Sharp All in One Printer TINSE2026QSZZ User Manual

MODEL  
MX-M260  
MX-M310  
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL  
SYSTEM  
OPERATION MANUAL  
Page  
BEFORE USING  
THE MACHINE  
9
COPY FUNCTIONS  
22  
CONVENIENT COPY  
FUNCTIONS  
36  
NETWORK SCANNER  
FUNCTION  
54  
90  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(GENERAL)  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)  
96  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
AND MAINTENANCE  
116  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES  
AND SUPPLIES  
139  
143  
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
CAUTIONS................................................................................................................................................. 4  
CAUTIONS ON USING THE MACHINE........................................................................................................... 4  
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN SELECTING AN INSTALLATION SITE ........................................................... 4  
CAUTIONS ON HANDLING THE MACHINE.................................................................................................... 5  
LASER INFORMATION.................................................................................................................................... 5  
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................. 6  
USING THE MANUAL ............................................................................................................................... 6  
ABOUT THE OPERATION MANUALS............................................................................................................. 6  
THE MEANING OF "R" IN ORIGINAL AND PAPER SIZE INDICATIONS ....................................................... 7  
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL....................................................................................................... 7  
MAIN FEATURES...................................................................................................................................... 8  
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
3
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS..................... 9  
OPERATION PANEL......................................11  
TOUCH PANEL ..............................................12  
COPY FINISHING FUNCTIONS...................... 36  
SORT COPY.................................................. 36  
GROUP COPY............................................... 36  
OFFSET FUNCTION (When the finisher is  
installed)......................................................... 36  
STAPLE SORT (when the finisher  
POWER ON AND OFF..................................... 14  
POWER ON....................................................14  
POWER OFF ..................................................14  
INITIAL SETTINGS.........................................15  
POWER SAVE MODES..................................15  
(MX-FN13) is installed) .................................. 38  
ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL AND  
STAPLING POSITIONS................................. 38  
LOADING PAPER............................................ 16  
PAPER............................................................16  
LOADING PAPER...........................................18  
CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND  
PAPER SIZE SETTINGS................................20  
SPECIAL MODES............................................ 40  
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING THE  
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS.................................. 41  
MARGIN SHIFT COPY .................................. 42  
ERASE COPY................................................ 43  
DUAL PAGE COPY ....................................... 44  
PAMPHLET COPY ........................................ 45  
JOB BUILD MODE......................................... 46  
MULTI SHOT COPY...................................... 47  
ORIGINAL SIZE............................................. 48  
COVER COPY............................................... 49  
B/W REVERSE COPY................................... 51  
CARD SHOT.................................................. 52  
2
COPY FUNCTIONS  
MAIN SCREEN OF COPY MODE ................... 22  
NORMAL COPYING ........................................ 23  
COPYING FROM THE DOCUMENT GLASS ....23  
COPYING FROM THE RSPF.........................24  
POINTS TO NOTE WHEN MAKING COPIES ...25  
BYPASS FEED (special paper) ......................27  
4
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING............. 28  
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS..................28  
USING THE RSPF..........................................29  
INTRODUCTION ......................................................54  
ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION...55  
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT............................ 30  
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AND  
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE......30  
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED  
FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE...... 56  
SETTINGS REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK  
SCANNER FUNCTION................................. 56  
ACCESSING WEB PAGES .......................... 56  
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE ............................. 57  
BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK  
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM............ 31  
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION .................31  
MANUAL RATIO SELECTION........................32  
SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND  
HORIZONTAL COPY RATIOS SEPARATELY  
(XY ZOOM copying)........................................33  
SCANNING................................................... 58  
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN....................... 35  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SMTP SERVER AND DNS SERVER  
SETTINGS.....................................................59  
CONFIGURING LDAP SERVER SETTINGS  
(WHEN USING AN LDAP SERVER).............60  
5
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)  
PROGRAMMING CUSTOM INDEX NAMES ....61  
SETTING UP DESTINATION INFORMATION..62  
SYSTEM SETTINGS........................................ 90  
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR SYSTEM  
SETTINGS..................................................... 54  
SETTINGS..................................................... 92  
STORING THE SENDER INFORMATION  
(Scan to E-mail) .............................................67  
PROTECTING INFORMATION  
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY............................. 93  
STORING A JOB PROGRAM........................ 93  
EXECUTING A JOB PROGRAM................... 94  
DELETING A STORED JOB PROGRAM...... 94  
PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE  
("Passwords") ................................................68  
RESTRICTING USE OF THE NETWORK  
SCANNER FUNCTION (USER  
AUDITING MODE ............................................ 95  
COPYING WHEN AUDITING MODE IS  
AUTHENTICATION) ......................................69  
ENABLED ...................................................... 95  
INITIAL SCREEN OF SCANNER MODE ........ 70  
SENDING AN IMAGE ...................................... 72  
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD ................72  
TRANSMISSION METHODS FOR SCAN TO E-  
MAIL................................................................74  
6
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
SCANNING AND TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED  
ORIGINAL (when an RSPF is installed)................76  
SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS  
(when an RSPF is installed) ................................77  
PURPOSE OF THE ADMINISTRATOR  
SETTINGS ....................................................... 96  
PROGRAMMING A ADMINISTRATOR  
PASSWORD .................................................... 96  
SCANNING SETTINGS (ORIGINAL SIZE,  
QUALITY, RESOLUTION, FILE FORMAT, AND  
SEND SETTING).............................................. 78  
USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS.... 97  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTING LIST.................. 99  
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE ......78  
SELECTING THE QUALITY................................79  
SELECTING THE RESOLUTION ........................80  
SELECTING THE FILE FORMAT........................81  
CHANGING THE SEND SETTINGS ....................82  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTING MENU ........... 101  
GENERAL PROGRAMS................................ 103  
ACCOUNT CONTROL................................. 103  
ENERGY SAVE ........................................... 105  
OPERATION SETTINGS............................. 106  
DEVICE CONTROL..................................... 107  
CHANGE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD. 109  
PRODUCT KEY........................................... 109  
CANCELING AN E-MAIL/FTP TRANSMISSION .... 83  
METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)........ 84  
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA  
TRANSMISSION.............................................. 85  
PROGRAMS FOR COPY MODE................... 110  
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES......85  
COPY SETTINGS........................................ 110  
METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO  
PROGRAMS FOR PRINT MODE.................. 111  
DESKTOP.........................................................85  
PRINT SETTINGS ....................................... 111  
TRANSMITTING METADATA ......................... 86  
PROGRAMS FOR NETWORK SCANNER  
MODE............................................................. 115  
SCANNER SETTINGS ................................ 115  
METADATA FIELDS ..........................................88  
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS ....................... 89  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
9
APPENDIX  
DISPLAY MESSAGES................................... 117  
TROUBLESHOOTING................................... 119  
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 143  
SPECIFICATIONS FOR NETWORK SCANNER .. 145  
PROBLEMS WHEN THE NETWORK SCANNER  
FUNCTION IS USED...................................... 123  
DISPLAY MESSAGES..................................125  
IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED.................126  
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO  
E-MAIL..........................................................126  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET.............. 146  
INDEX ............................................................ 154  
INDEX BY PURPOSE.................................. 158  
MISFEED REMOVAL..................................... 127  
MISFEED REMOVAL GUIDANCE ...............127  
MISFEED IN THE RSPF...............................128  
MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY ...............129  
MISFEED IN THE MACHINE........................129  
MISFEED IN THE CENTER TRAY...............131  
MISFEED IN THE UPPER PAPER TRAY....131  
MISFEED IN THE LOWER PAPER TRAY ...132  
MISFEED IN THE RIGHT TRAY (when a right  
tray (MX-TE10) is installed) ..........................132  
MISFEED IN THE UPPER EXIT AREA (when a  
job separator tray kit or finisher (MX-FN13) is  
TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE... 162  
installed)........................................................133  
MISFEED IN AN OUTPUT TRAY (when a  
finisher (MX-FN13) is installed).....................133  
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE ...... 134  
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT....... 135  
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY AND  
TOTAL COUNT.............................................. 137  
CLEANING THE MACHINE........................... 137  
DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF.................137  
THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER.....138  
8
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES................................ 139  
FINISHER (MX-FN13) ..................................140  
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT/ 2 x 500-  
SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT.........................141  
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES............................. 142  
PROPER STORAGE ....................................142  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTIONS  
Follow the cautions below when using this machine.  
CAUTIONS ON USING THE MACHINE  
Warning:  
• The fusing area is hot. Exercise care in this area when removing misfed paper.  
• Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.  
Caution:  
• Do not switch the machine rapidly on and off. After turning the machine off, wait 10 to 15 seconds before turning it  
back on.  
• Machine power must be turned off before installing any supplies.  
• Place the machine on a firm, level surface.  
• Do not install the machine in a humid or dusty location.  
• When the machine is not used for a long time, for example, during prolonged holidays, turn the power switch off  
and remove the power cord from the outlet.  
• When moving the machine, be sure to turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet.  
• Do not cover the machine with a dust cover, cloth or plastic film while the power is on. Doing so may prevent heat  
dissipation, damaging the machine.  
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in  
hazardous laser radiation exposure.  
• The socket-outlet should be installed near the machine and should be easily accessible.  
• Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.  
• Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.  
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN SELECTING AN  
INSTALLATION SITE  
Improper installation may damage the machine. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the  
machine is moved.  
If the machine is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the machine. Operation  
in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the machine at room temperature for at least  
2 hours before use.  
Caution  
Do not install your machine in areas that are:  
damp, humid, or very  
exposed to direct sunlight  
dusty  
poorly  
ventilated  
subject to extreme  
temperature or humidity  
changes, e.g., near an  
air conditioner or  
heater.  
The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection and  
disconnection.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and  
current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.  
Connect the machine to a power outlet which is not used for other electric appliances. If a lighting fixture is  
connected to the same outlet, the light may flicker.  
Note  
Be sure to allow the required space around the  
machine for servicing and proper ventilation.  
12" (30cm)  
12"  
(30cm)  
12"  
(30cm)  
CAUTION:  
Do not install the machine in a location with poor air circulation.  
A small amount of ozone is created inside the machine during printing. The amount of ozone created is not  
sufficient to be harmful; however, an unpleasant odor may be noticed during large copy runs, and thus the  
machine should be installed in a room with a ventilation fan or windows that provide sufficient air circulation.  
(The odor may occasionally cause headaches.)  
* Install the machine so that people are not directly exposed to exhaust from the machine. If installed near a  
window, ensure that the machine is not exposed to direct sunlight.  
Note:  
3
The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m ) calculated as an 8 hr. time-  
weighted average concentration.  
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the  
machine in a ventilated area.  
CAUTIONS ON HANDLING THE MACHINE  
Observe the following precautions when handling the machine to maintain top performance.  
Do not drop the machine, subject it to shock or strike it against any object.  
Store spare toner cartridges in a cool dry place without removing from the package before use.  
• If they are exposed to direct sunlight or excessive heat, poor copies may result.  
Do not touch the photoconductive drum (green portion).  
• Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty copies.  
Safety precautions:  
This Digital Copier is rated Class I and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This  
means that the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.  
• Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.  
• The machine’s exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by  
inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.  
This product utilizes a CR coin Lithium battery which contains a Perchlorate material. Special handling for this  
material may apply, California residents, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/  
Others, consult local environmental officers.  
LASER INFORMATION  
785 nm +10 nm  
Wave length  
-15 nm  
North America:  
Europe:  
26 cpm model: (6.213 µs)/7 mm  
31 cpm model: (7.385 µs)/7 mm  
Pulse times  
26 cpm model: (6.213 µs)/7 mm  
31 cpm model: (7.385 µs)/7 mm  
Output power  
Max. 0.9 mW  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION  
®
Products that have earned the ENERGY STAR are designed to protect the environment  
through superior energy efficiency.  
The Environmental Choice Program guidelines are applied to the products only in Canada. The  
products that meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines carry the logo shown to the left.  
The products without the logo may not meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines.  
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"  
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE  
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED  
SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY.  
This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury. Disposal of these  
materials may be regulated due to environmental consideration. For disposal or recycling information, please  
contact your local authorities, the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org, the lamp recycling organization:  
www.lamprecycle.org or Sharp at 1-800-BE-SHARP.  
(For U.S.A. Only)  
USING THE MANUAL  
This machine has been designed to provide convenient copying features in a minimum amount of office space and  
with maximum operational ease. To get full use of all machine features, be sure to familiarize yourself with this  
manual and the machine. For quick reference during machine use, keep this manual in a handy location.  
ABOUT THE OPERATION MANUALS  
The operation manuals for the machine are as follows:  
Operation Manual (this manual)  
This manual contains explanations of the product and procedures for using the machine as a copier or network  
scanner.  
This also explains administrator settings for machine management and copier related functions.  
Administrator settings for the fax functions are explained in the operation manual for facsimile.  
Online manual (for printer)  
This manual is on the CD-ROM, and explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer, network printer, and  
network scanner.  
Software setup guide (for printer)  
This manual contains instructions for installing the software that allows the machine to be used with your computer  
and procedures for establishing initial printer settings.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THE MEANING OF "R" IN ORIGINAL AND PAPER SIZE  
INDICATIONS  
An "R" appearing at the end of an original or paper size (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, etc.) indicates that the original  
or paper is oriented horizontally as shown below.  
<Horizontal (Landscape) orientation>  
Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal (landscape) orientation (8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"), do not contain the  
"R" in their size indication.  
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL  
Warns that injury may result if the contents of the warning are not properly followed.  
Warning  
Caution  
Note  
Cautions that damage to the machine or one of its components may result if the contents of the  
caution are not properly followed.  
Notes provide useful information on the specifications, functions, performance, and operation of  
the machine.  
Explanation of words and illustration  
• This operation manual refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as the "RSPF".  
• The illustrations in this manual show the MX-M260/MX-M310 with the optional job separator tray kit (MX-TR11)  
installed.  
The appearance of your machine may be different depending on the model and options installed, however, the  
basic operations are the same.  
RSPF  
• For peripheral devices that can be installed, see "PERIPHERAL DEVICES" (p.139).  
• The explanations in this manual assume that the person who will install the product and the users of the product  
have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows.  
• In this manual, American spellings are used.  
• For information on the operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.  
• The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are for Windows Vista. The screens may vary  
depending on your Windows version and settings.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAIN FEATURES  
High-speed laser copying  
• First-copy time* is only 4.8 seconds (MX-M260) or 4.5 seconds (MX-M310).  
• Copying speed is 26 copies/min. (MX-M260) or 31 copies/min. (MX-M310). This is ideal for business use and  
provides a big boost to workplace productivity.  
* First-Copy time may vary depending on the power-supply voltage, ambient temperature, and other operating conditions.  
High-quality digital image  
• In addition to automatic exposure adjustment, three original type modes are available: "TEXT mode" for text-only  
originals, "TEXT/PHOTO mode" for mixed text and photo originals, and "PHOTO mode" for photos. The exposure  
can be manually adjusted to 5 levels in each mode.  
Enhanced copying features  
• Zoom copies can be made from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.  
• Continuous copying of up to 999 copies is possible.  
• Automatic two-sided copying can be performed.  
• Useful special features such as erase, margin shift, 2 in 1 and 4 in 1, pamphlet copy, dual page copy and cover  
copy are available.  
A
A
A
A
Erase copy  
Margin shift copy  
2in1 copy 4in1 copy  
2
1
SHARP  
Pamphlet copy  
Dual page copy  
Cover copy  
Card shot  
• Administrator settings allow the setting or modification of functions to meet your specific needs. The administrator  
settings can also be used to enable audit mode, which allows the machine administrator to control use of the  
machine.  
Black and white LCD touch panel makes it easy to operate the machine  
• Employing a backlit black and white LCD display, the touch panel provides step-by-step guidance for each function  
of the machine. The touch panel even provides instructions for removing paper misfeeds and other problems that  
occur.  
Environment and people friendly design  
• Preheat and auto power shut-off modes are provided to reduce power consumption when the machine is not in  
use.  
• A universal design has been implemented in the product whereby the height of the operation panel and shape of  
the keys are designed to be usable by as many people as possible.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
1
This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using the machine.  
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
Exterior  
1
2
3
6
7
16  
4
5
8
12  
11  
9
17  
18  
13  
14  
19  
10  
20  
21  
15  
1
9
Document feeder tray  
Power switch  
Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up  
here. (p.24)  
Press to turn the machine power on and off. (p.14)  
10  
11  
Handles  
Use to move the machine.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Original guides  
Adjust to the size of the originals.  
Operation panel  
Document feeder cover  
Open to remove misfed originals. (p.128)  
Contains operation keys and the touch panel.  
(p.11)  
12  
Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)  
Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this  
tray.  
Reversing tray  
Pull out to remove misfed originals. (p.128)  
Exit area  
13  
14  
Center tray  
Finished copies are delivered to the center tray.  
Originals exit the machine here after copying.  
Document transport cover  
Open to remove misfed originals. (p.128)  
Front cover  
Open to remove paper misfeeds and perform  
machine maintenance. (p.129)  
Document transport cover knob  
Pull to open the document transport cover (p.128)  
Document glass  
Place an original that you wish to scan face down  
here. (p.23)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
Interior  
22  
27  
23  
24  
25  
26  
15  
24  
25  
Paper trays  
Each tray holds 500 sheets of copy paper. (p.16)  
Roller rotating knob  
Turn to remove misfed paper. (p.129)  
16  
Upper right side cover  
Photoconductive drum  
Open to remove misfeeds when an optional job  
separator tray kit or a optional finisher is installed.  
(p.133)  
Copy images are formed on the photoconductive  
drum.  
Do not touch the photoconductive drum  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Side cover  
Open to remove misfeeds. (p.129)  
Caution  
(green portion). Doing so may damage the  
drum and cause smudges on copies.  
Side cover handle  
Pull to open the side cover. (p.129)  
26  
Fusing unit release levers  
To remove a paper misfeed in the fusing unit, push  
up on these levers and remove the paper. (p.130)  
Bypass tray paper guides  
Adjust to the width of the paper. (p.19)  
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch  
the fusing unit when removing  
Warning  
Bypass tray  
Regular paper and special paper (such as  
transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray.  
(p.19)  
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a  
burn or injury.  
27  
Fusing unit paper guide  
Open to remove misfed paper. (p.130)  
21  
Bypass tray extension  
Pull out the bypass tray extension before placing  
paper in the bypass tray. (p.19)  
The model name is on the front cover of the  
machine.  
Note  
22  
23  
Toner cartridge lock release lever  
Use to unlock the toner cartridge. (p.134)  
Toner cartridge  
Contains toner. (p.134)  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
OPERATION PANEL  
COPY  
PRINT  
SCAN  
FAX  
ON LINE  
DATA  
DATA  
LINE  
DATA  
JOB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
LOGOUT  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
1
3
4
Touch panel  
[JOB STATUS] key  
Press to display the current job status. (p.13)  
The machine status, messages and touch keys are  
displayed on the panel. The display will show the  
status of printing, copying or network scanning  
according to the mode that is selected. For details  
see the next page.  
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key  
Use to adjust various settings of the machine  
including the contrast of the touch panel and  
administrator settings. (p.91)  
2
Mode select keys and indicators  
Use to change modes and the corresponding  
display on the touch panel.  
[COPY] key  
Press to select copy mode.  
5
6
Numeric keys  
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.  
[LOGOUT] key ( )  
When auditing mode is enabled, press this key  
after finishing a job to return the machine to  
account number entry standby.  
[PRINT] key/ONLINE indicator/  
DATA indicator  
Press to select print mode.  
ONLINE indicator  
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.  
7
8
[#/P] key ( )  
Use this key to execute a job program in copy  
mode.  
DATA indicator  
The key is also used to dial in fax mode.  
A print job is in memory. The indicator lights  
steadily while the job is held in memory, and  
blinks while the job is printed.  
[CLEAR] key ( )  
Press to clear a copy number setting or cancel a  
job.  
[SCAN] key/DATA indicator (When the network  
scanner option is installed.)  
Press to select network scan mode when the  
network scanner option is installed.  
DATA indicator  
Lights steadily or blinks while a scanned image  
9
[CLEAR ALL] key ( )  
Resets the settings to the initial settings.  
10  
[START] key ( )  
Press in copy mode, scanner mode, or fax mode to  
begin copying, network scanning, or faxing.  
is being sent.  
This key blinks when auto power shut mode has  
activated. Press the key to return to normal  
operation.  
(See "4. NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION".)  
[FAX] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator (When  
the fax option is installed.)  
Press to select fax mode when the fax option is  
installed.  
LINE indicator  
11  
[INTERRUPT] key ( )  
Use to perform an interrupt copy job. (p.35)  
this lights up while faxes are being sent or  
received.  
DATA indicator  
Blinks when a fax has been received to memory  
and lights steadily when a fax is waiting in  
memory for transmission.  
(See operation manual for facsimile.)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
TOUCH PANEL  
Using the touch panel  
Selecting a function  
[Example 1]  
[Example 1]  
Items on the touch panel  
are selected by touching  
the key associated with  
the item. A beep will  
sound to confirm that the  
item was selected and  
the key will be  
highlighted.  
* A double-beep is  
sounded when an  
Items which are  
CANCEL  
OK  
JOB QUEUE  
COPY  
SETS / PROG  
003 / 000  
highlighted at the time a  
screen appears are  
already selected and will  
take effect when the [OK]  
key is touched.  
LEFT  
RI
BINDING BINDING  
SHARP001  
003 / 000  
Beep  
tone  
[Example 2]  
invalid key is touched.  
If you need to cancel a selection, simply press the key  
once again so that it is not highlighted.  
[Example 2]  
Keys which are grayed  
out cannot be selected.  
1/13  
COMPLETE  
1/  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
MULTI SHOT  
The confirmation beeps can be disabled in the  
administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
The key is no longer  
highlighted and the  
selection is canceled.  
1/  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
The touch panel screens shown in this manual are  
printed images and may differ from the actual screens.  
MULTI SHOT  
[Example 3]  
When the machine is  
used in copy mode or fax  
mode and a special  
mode is selected, a icon  
will appear on the touch  
panel.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
Job status screen (common to copy, print, network scan and fax)  
This screen appears when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.  
A job list showing the current job and the stored jobs or a list showing completed jobs can be displayed.  
The contents of jobs can be viewed and jobs can be deleted from the queue. The following screen shows the job  
queue for print jobs.  
1
2
JOB QUEUE  
COMPLETE  
JOB QUEUE  
COPY  
SETS / PROGRESS  
003 / 000  
STATUS  
1
*
1/1  
PAPER EMPTY  
1
003 / 000  
010 / 000  
SHARP001  
WAITING  
WAITING  
DETAIL  
PRIORITY  
0666211221  
STOP/DELETE  
PRINT JOB  
SCAN TO  
FAX JOB  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
3
Job list  
Shows stored jobs and the job currently being  
[PRINT JOB] key  
Use to view the list of output jobs for all modes  
(print, copy, and fax).  
3
5
executed. Touch one of keys  
to  
in the above  
illustration to select the type of job. The icon next to  
each job name indicates the mode of the job as  
follows:  
4
5
[SCAN TO] key  
Displays a network scanner job (When the network  
scanner function is installed.).  
Copy mode  
Printer mode  
[FAX JOB] key  
This displays stored fax jobs and the fax job  
currently being executed (When the fax option is  
installed.).  
Network scanner mode  
Fax mode  
Fax mode  
6
7
Display switching keys  
Use to change the page of the displayed job list.  
(Send jobs)  
(Receive jobs)  
The jobs in the job list appear in the form of keys.  
To give priority to a job or pause or delete a job,  
touch the key of the job and then use the key  
[STOP/DELETE] key  
Use to pause or delete a job currently being  
executed, or to delete a stored job. Copy jobs and  
received faxes cannot be paused or deleted with  
this key. Copy jobs can be canceled by pressing  
the [CLEAR] key ( ) or [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
7
8
described in  
or  
.
1
* :"PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display  
"PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display  
indicates that the machine is out of the specified  
size of paper. Add the specified size of paper. If  
the specified size of paper is not available and  
you are in printer mode, another size of paper  
can be loaded in the bypass tray to allow printing  
to take place. (See the "Online manual".)  
8
9
[PRIORITY] key  
Touch this key after selecting a stored job in this  
[JOB QUEUE] list to print the job ahead of the  
other jobs.  
2
Mode switching keys  
[DETAIL] key  
Use to select the job list mode: "JOB QUEUE"  
(Stored/currently executing jobs) or "COMPLETE"  
(Finished jobs).  
Shows information on the selected job. This cannot  
be used for a received fax.  
"JOB QUEUE":  
Shows jobs that have been stored and the job that  
is currently being executed.  
"COMPLETE":  
Shows the jobs that have been finished. Note that  
copy jobs do not appear in this list.  
If the power is turned off, or if auto power shut-off  
mode activates when there are no jobs, the jobs in  
the "COMPLETE" list will be erased.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER ON AND OFF  
The power switch is located on the left side of the machine.  
When the power switch is turned on, the machine starts up in the previously used mode. The following  
explanations assume that the previously used mode was copy mode.  
Note  
POWER ON  
Turn the power switch to the "ON" position.  
POWER OFF  
When the machine is not used for a long time, be sure  
to turn it off.  
ON  
Make sure that the machine is not in operation  
and then turn the power switch to the "OFF"  
position.  
When the power switch is turned to the "ON" position,  
the message "WARMING UP. A COPYING JOB CAN  
BE SET NOW." will appear in the message display and  
the machine will start warming up. When "READY TO  
COPY." appears, the machine is ready to copy. Copy  
settings can be selected during warm-up.  
OFF  
If the power switch is turned off while the machine is in  
operation, a misfeed may occur and the job that was in  
progress will be canceled.  
• If auditing mode is enabled, "ENTER YOUR  
ACCOUNT NUMBER." will appear. When a valid  
account number is entered, the account status will  
appear on the main screen for several seconds.  
Then copying can be performed. (See "6. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
If the fax option is installed, be sure to keep the power turned on. Faxes cannot be received when the power is  
turned off.  
Note  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
INITIAL SETTINGS  
The machine reverts to the initial settings when it is first turned on, when the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) is pressed, or the  
preset "auto clear time" elapses after the last copy is made in any mode. When the machine reverts to the initial  
settings, all settings and functions selected to that point are canceled. The auto clear time can be changed in the  
administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
The initial settings that appear in the display are shown below.  
1
Functions and settings are explained based on the above screen as applicable.  
Copy ratio: 100%, Exposure: Automatic, Copy quantity: 0, Automatic two-sided: One side to One side,  
Auto paper selection: On,  
Paper tray: Upper paper tray  
The initial settings can be changed in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
Note  
For the initial settings (initial screen) of printer, fax, and scanner modes, see the operation manuals of those  
modes.  
POWER SAVE MODES  
The machine has two power save modes to reduce overall power consumption and thereby reduce the cost of  
operation. These modes help conserve natural resources and reduce environmental pollution. The two power save  
modes are "Preheat mode" and "Auto power shut-off mode".  
The time settings for each mode can be changed in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
Preheat mode  
When the set time elapses, the temperature of the fusing unit is automatically lowered to reduce power consumption  
while on standby. To return to normal operation, touch any key on the operation panel. To make a copy when the  
machine is in this mode, simply select the desired copy selections and then press the [START] key ( ).  
Auto power shut-off mode  
When the set time elapses, the power to the fusing unit automatically turns off to reduce power consumption. (This is  
based on the guidelines of the International Energy Star Program.) When the machine enters this mode, the touch  
panel screen turns off and only the [START] key ( ) blinks. To return to normal operation, press the [START] key  
( ). To copy after warm-up starts, make desired copy selections and press the [START] key ( ). When the  
machine receives a fax or a print job, Auto power shut-off mode automatically deactivates and the machine returns  
to normal operation.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOADING PAPER  
When a tray runs out of paper, a message appears in the touch panel. Load paper in the tray.  
PAPER  
The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below.  
For best results, use only SHARP recommended paper.  
Tray  
No.  
Paper tray type  
Paper type  
Plain paper  
Letterhead paper  
Recycled paper  
Color paper  
Size  
Weight  
Capacity  
*1  
4
1
Upper paper tray  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 15 lbs. to 28 lbs.  
11" x 17"  
(A5 to A3)  
500 sheets*  
(56 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)  
*2  
2
Lower paper tray  
3
500-sheet paper  
feed unit/  
Upper paper tray of  
2 x 500-sheet paper  
feed unit  
4
Lower paper tray of  
2 x 500-sheet paper  
feed unit  
4
Bypass tray  
Plain paper  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 16 lbs. to 34.5 lbs.  
100 sheets*  
2
2
*3  
2
Letterhead paper  
Recycled paper  
Color paper  
11" x 17"  
(60  
g/m to 128  
g/m )  
(A6 to A3)  
Thin paper  
15 lbs. to 16 lbs.  
100 sheets  
30 sheets  
2
(56 g/m to 59 g/m )  
Heavy paper  
Max. 54 lbs.  
2
(200 g/m )  
Labels  
40 sheets  
40 sheets  
5 sheets  
Transparency film  
Envelope International DL  
(110 x 220 mm)  
International C5  
(162 x 229 mm)  
Commercial 10  
(4-1/8" x 9-1/2")  
1
* 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size paper can only be loaded in tray 1 and the bypass tray.  
2
* B5 size paper cannot be loaded in tray 2 (However, B5R paper can be loaded.).  
2
3
* When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size, do not use paper of weight greater than 28 lbs. (105 g/m ).  
4
2
* When paper weight is 21 lbs. (80 g/m ). The number of sheets of paper which can be loaded varies depending on the weight  
of the paper.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
Special papers  
Follow these guidelines when using special papers.  
• Use SHARP recommended transparency film and  
label sheets. Using other than SHARP  
Envelopes  
Do not use the following envelopes (Misfeeds will  
occur.).  
• Envelopes with metal tabs, clasps, strings, holes, or  
windows.  
• Envelopes with rough fibers, carbon paper, or glossy  
surfaces.  
recommended paper may result in misfeeds or  
smudges on the output. If other than SHARP  
recommended media must be used, feed each sheet  
one at a time using the bypass tray (Do not attempt  
continuous copying or printing.).  
• Envelopes with two or more flaps.  
• Envelopes with tape, film, or paper attached to the  
flap.  
• Envelopes with a fold in the flap.  
• Envelopes with glue on the flap to be moistened for  
sealing.  
• Envelopes with labels or stamps.  
• Envelopes that are slightly inflated with air.  
• Envelopes with glue protruding from the seal area.  
• Envelopes with part of the seal area peeled off.  
• There are many varieties of special paper available  
on the market, and some cannot be used with this  
machine. Before using special paper, contact a  
SHARP service center.  
1
• Before using other than SHARP recommended  
paper, make a test copy to see if the paper is  
suitable.  
Letterhead paper  
Letterhead paper is paper with information pre-printed  
at the top such as a company name and address.  
SHARP  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
LOADING PAPER  
Make sure that the machine is not copying, printing, or printing a received fax, and then follow these steps to load paper.  
Loading the paper in the paper tray  
Pull out the paper tray until it stops.  
Load paper in the tray.  
1
5
If you are loading the  
same size of paper as  
was loaded previously,  
go to step 4. If you are  
loading a different size of  
paper, continue with the  
following step.  
Maximum height line  
Load the paper with the print side facing up.  
Squeeze the lock lever of the front  
guide and slide the front guide to  
match the width of the paper.  
Note  
• Insert the paper along the guides.  
• The tray holds up to 500 sheets of 21 lb.  
2
2
(80g/m ) bond paper.  
• Do not load paper above the maximum  
height line.  
Front guide  
• When adding paper, first remove any  
paper remaining in the tray, combine it  
with the paper to be added, and then  
reload as a single stack.  
Left guide  
Push the paper tray firmly back into  
the machine.  
6
Move the left guide to the appropriate  
3
slot as marked on the tray.  
When using 11" x 17"  
copy paper, store the left  
guide in the slot at the left  
front of the paper tray.  
If you loaded a different size of paper that was loaded  
previously, place the appropriate paper size card in the  
front of the paper tray to indicate the new paper size.  
Fan the copy paper.  
4
Paper size card  
If you loaded a different size of paper that  
Note  
was loaded previously, go to "CHANGING A  
TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE  
SETTINGS" (p.20).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
Loading paper in the bypass tray  
Unfold the bypass tray.  
Insert the copy paper (print side  
down) all the way into the bypass tray.  
1
3
1
To enable correct  
detection of the paper  
size, be sure to pull out  
the bypass tray  
extension.  
Set the paper guides to the copy  
paper width.  
2
Important points when inserting paper in the bypass tray  
• Be sure to place envelopes horizontally as shown in  
the following diagram.  
• Load the paper with the print side facing down.  
Landscape  
orientation  
Portrait  
orientation  
• When loading envelopes, make sure that they are  
straight and flat and do not have loosely glued  
construction flaps (not the closure flap).  
• When adding paper, first remove any paper  
remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the  
paper to be added, and then reload as a single  
stack. The paper to be added must be the same size  
and type as the paper already in the bypass tray.  
• Do not use paper that is smaller than the original  
image. This may cause smudges or unclean images.  
• Do not use paper that has already been printed on  
by a laser printer or plain paper fax machine. This  
may cause smudges or unclean images.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE  
SETTINGS  
When you change the paper in a tray, follow the steps below to change the tray’s paper type and paper size settings.  
The settings cannot be changed when operation has stopped because the paper ran out or a misfeed occurred, or  
when an interrupt copy job is being performed.  
Even in copy mode, the settings cannot be changed while a print job or received fax is being printed.  
• 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size paper can only be set for tray 1.  
Note  
• B5 size paper cannot be set for tray 2 (However, B5R size paper can be set.).  
Tray settings for trays other than the bypass tray can be prohibited in the administrator settings. (See "6.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
Load paper in the tray as explained in  
"Loading the paper in the paper tray"  
(p.18).  
Select the size and type of paper that  
is loaded in the tray.  
1
2
5
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
OK  
TRAY 1 TYPE/SIZE SETTING  
TYPE  
SIZE  
AB  
INCH  
8½x13  
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
PLAIN  
LETTER HEAD  
COLOR  
11x17  
8½x11  
8½x14  
RECYCLED  
8½x11R  
5½x8½  
DATA  
CAN  
FAX  
JOB STATUS  
The system settings  
menu screen will appear.  
LINE  
DATA  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
The currently selected paper type will be highlighted.  
• To change the paper type selection, touch the  
appropriate type key.  
• To change the paper size selection, touch the  
appropriate size key.  
To change the displayed size selections to AB sizes,  
touch [AB INCH].  
Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.  
3
TOTAL COUNT  
The tray settings screen  
will appear.  
CONTRA  
Touch the [OK] key.  
6
ADDRES  
TRAY SETTINGS  
CONTRO  
A message appears prompting you to  
check the paper in the tray. Check the  
paper and then touch the [OK] key.  
7
KEYB
ADMI  
SELECT  
You will return to the tray settings screen.  
Select the tray in which you loaded  
paper.  
4
For the tray numbers,  
TYPE / SIZE  
see "PAPER" (p.16).  
If the desired tray does  
not appear in the display,  
TRAY 1  
TRAY 2  
TRAY 3  
PLAIN / 8½x11  
LAIN / 8½x14  
use the  
key or  
key  
to scroll until it appears.  
PLAIN / 11x17  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE  
Setting the paper type in the bypass tray  
Use either of the following two methods to set the bypass tray's paper type setting.  
From the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key  
From the [PAPER SELECT] key  
Load paper in the bypass tray as  
explained in "Loading paper in the  
bypass tray" (p.19).  
Load paper in the bypass tray as  
explained in "Loading paper in the  
bypass tray" (p.19).  
1
1
2
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.  
2
DATA  
CAN  
The system settings  
1
EXPOSURE  
menu screen will appear.  
LINE  
DATA  
FAX  
AUTO 8½x11  
PAPER ELECT  
JOB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
100%  
Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.  
Touch the paper type selection key.  
3
3
TOTAL COUNT  
The tray settings screen  
CONTRA  
READY TO COPY.  
0
will appear.  
ADDRES  
TRAY SETTINGS  
AUTO  
CONTRO  
11x17  
PLAIN  
8½x11  
8½x14  
EXPOSURE  
RECYCLED  
PLAIN  
KEYB
ADMI  
PAPER SELECT  
SELECT  
EXTRA
ADJUST  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
Touch the [BYPASS TRAY] key.  
4
Select the paper type.  
4
TYPE / SIZE  
READY TO COPY.  
0
TRAY 4  
PLAIN / 11x17  
AUTO  
PLAIN  
LETTER HEAD  
COLOR  
ENVELOPE  
LABELS  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
EXPOSURE  
PLAIN  
RECYCLED  
PAPER SELECT  
HEAVY APER  
THIN PAPER  
TRANSPARENCY  
JAPANESE P/C  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
Select the type of paper that is loaded  
in the tray.  
5
"JAPANESE P/C" refers to official postcards used in  
Japan.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
OK  
BYPASS TRAY TYPE SETTING  
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.  
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.  
5
PLAIN  
LETTER HEAD  
COLOR  
ENVELOPE  
LABELS  
JAPANESE P/C  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
RECYCLED  
HEAVY PAPE
THIN PAPER  
TRANSPARENCY  
"JAPANESE P/C" refers to official postcards used in  
Japan.  
Touch the [OK] key.  
6
You will return to the tray settings screen.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
2
This chapter explains basic copying functions such as normal copying, reduction or enlargement, and exposure  
adjustment.  
MAIN SCREEN OF COPY MODE  
The main screen of copy mode shows messages, keys, and settings that are used for copying. Touch a key to make  
a selection. The main screen of copy mode appears when the [COPY] key is pressed (Except when the system  
settings screen appears.).  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
The screen will vary depending on the  
equipment installed.  
6
7
8
9
1
2
8
Message display  
Status messages are displayed here.  
Copy number display  
Displays the selected number of copies before the  
[START] key ( ) is pressed or the number of  
remaining copies after the [START] key ( ) is  
pressed. A single copy can be made when "0" is  
displayed.  
Paper size display  
This shows the location of the paper trays, the size of  
the paper in the trays. "  
there is paper. A paper tray can be touched to change  
the paper tray selection.  
" indicates whether or not  
9
Original size display  
Displays the original size only when an original is  
placed for copying.  
3
4
10  
[2-SIDED COPY] key (p.28)  
Touch to open the duplex copy mode setting screen.  
Exposure display  
Displays the icon of the selected exposure type  
and the exposure scale.  
[OUTPUT] key (p.36)  
Touch to select sort, group, staple sort, and other  
output settings.  
11  
12  
[EXPOSURE] key (p.30)  
Use this key to adjust the copy exposure.  
5
6
[SPECIAL MODES] key (p.40)  
Touch to open the special modes selection screen.  
Paper select display  
Displays the selected paper size. When auto paper  
select mode is selected, "AUTO" appears when  
auto paper select mode is selected.  
[INFORMATION] icon  
The [INFORMATION] icon appears in the base  
screen when one or more special modes are  
selected.  
13  
14  
[PAPER SELECT] key (p.23, p.27)  
Use this key to select the paper size.  
Copy ratio display  
7
Original feed display  
This appears when an original is placed in the  
RSPF.  
Displays the selected copy ratio.  
15  
[COPY RATIO] key (p.32)  
Use this key to select the copy ratio.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NORMAL COPYING  
COPYING FROM THE DOCUMENT GLASS  
If "AUDITING MODE" (p.95) has been enabled, enter your 5-digit account number.  
Note  
To load paper, see "LOADING PAPER"  
Open the RSPF and place the original  
face down on the document glass.  
1
Note  
(p.16). If you change the paper size in the  
tray, you will also need to change the tray's  
paper size and paper type settings. (p.20)  
The paper types for the auto paper selection  
function can be selected, or the function disabled,  
in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
Manually selecting the paper size (paper tray)  
If auto paper selection is disabled in the administrator  
settings, or if you wish to use a different size of paper  
than the original, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and  
select the paper tray with the desired paper size. (The  
selected paper will be highlighted and the paper selecting  
screen will close.)  
2
[How to place the original]  
Align the corner or the original with the tip of the arrow  
(
) at the left rear corner of the glass as shown in the  
illustration.  
To close the screen without selecting a paper size, touch  
the [PAPER SELECT] key again.  
Original scale  
Original scale  
READY TO COPY.  
0
AUTO  
PLAIN  
11x17  
PLAIN  
1.8½x11  
2.8½x14  
5-1/2" x  
8-1/2"  
8-1/2" x  
14"  
EXPOSURE  
R
8-1/2" x 11"  
RECYCLED  
8-1/2" x 11"  
11" x 17"  
PAPER SELECT  
EXTRA IMAGE  
ADJUST  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
Close the RSPF.  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
2
3
4
The original size appears  
in the touch panel.  
After placing the original,  
be sure to close the  
RSPF. If left open, parts  
outside of the original will  
be copied black, causing  
excessive use of toner.  
LOGOUT  
UT  
If the original size is not automatically  
detected, manually set the original size. (p.48)  
Note  
• The number in the copy quantity display will  
decrease by 1 each time a copy is made.  
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be  
made with the copy number display showing "0".  
• To clear a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ).  
Make sure that the same size of paper  
as the original is automatically  
selected.  
• Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to stop  
copying in the middle of a run.  
The selected tray is  
highlighted. If the tray  
contains a different size of  
paper than the original,  
"LOAD xxxx PAPER." will  
appear.  
Note  
To repeat the same copy sequence for a  
different original, simply replace the  
original and press the [START] key ( ).  
• If copying stops because the tray has run  
out of paper, you can resume copying by  
touching the [PAPER SELECT] key and  
selecting the bypass tray or a paper tray  
that has the same size and type of paper  
loaded in the same orientation.  
Even if the message above is displayed, copying can  
be performed using the selected paper tray.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
COPYING FROM THE RSPF  
• If "AUDITING MODE" (p.95) is enabled, enter your 5-digit account number.  
• If the RSPF is disabled in the administrator settings, the RSPF cannot be used. See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Note  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".  
To load paper, see "LOADING PAPER"  
Make sure that an original has not  
been left on the document glass and  
then close the RSPF.  
1
Note  
(p.16). If you change the paper size in the  
tray, you will also need to change the  
tray's paper size and paper type settings.  
(p.20)  
• If needed, manually select the paper tray  
that has the desired size of paper as  
explained on page 22.  
If an original remains on  
the document glass after a  
copy was made,  
"REMOVE THE  
The paper types for the auto paper selection  
function can be selected, or the function  
disabled, in the administrator settings. (See "6.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
ORIGINAL FROM THE  
DOCUMENT GLASS." will  
appear in the touch panel.  
• If the original size is larger than the paper  
size, the result of copying from the  
document glass may differ from the result  
of copying from the RSPF. (p.23)  
Adjust the original guides to the size  
of the original.  
2
3
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
5
Place the originals face up in the  
document feeder tray.  
LOGOUT  
Insert the originals all the  
way into the feed slot.  
The original size appears  
in the touch panel.  
UT  
• The number in the copy quantity display will  
decrease by 1 each time a copy is made.  
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be  
made with the copy number display showing "0".  
• To clear a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ).  
• Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to stop  
copying in the middle of a run.  
Note  
2
• Up to 100 pages (24 lbs. (90 g/m )) can  
Note  
• If copying stops because the tray has run  
out of paper, you can resume copying by  
touching the [PAPER SELECT] key and  
selecting the bypass tray or a paper tray  
that has the same size and type of paper  
loaded in the same orientation.  
be inserted at once. The stack of originals  
must not be higher than the indicator line  
on the tray.  
• If the original size is not automatically  
detected, manually set the original size.  
(p.48)  
Stream feeding mode  
Make sure that the same size of paper  
as the original is selected.  
If stream feeding mode is enabled in the administrator  
settings, "SET ORIGINALS FOR STREAM FEEDING."  
will appear in the touch panel for approximately 5  
seconds after the originals are fed. Any new originals  
placed in the RSPF while this message appears will be  
fed and copied automatically.  
4
The selected tray is  
highlighted. If none of the  
trays have the same size  
of paper as the original,  
"LOAD xxxx PAPER."  
will appear.  
Copying a large number of originals  
Job Build mode is useful when you need to copy more  
originals that can be placed in the RSPF at once. For  
information on Job Build mode, see "JOB BUILD  
MODE" (p.46).  
Even if the message above is displayed, copying can  
be performed using the selected paper tray.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
POINTS TO NOTE WHEN MAKING COPIES  
Document glass and RSPF  
• Paper in a different orientation from the original can be selected if the auto paper select or auto image function has  
been selected. In this case, the image of the original will be rotated.  
• When copying a book or an original that has been folded or crumpled, press down gently on the RSPF. This will  
reduce shadow lines caused by uneven contact between the original and the document glass.  
• When the center tray counter function is enabled, the number of pages that can be delivered to the output tray is  
limited to 500 (A4 and 8-1/2" x 14" sizes only; the limit for all other sizes is 300 pages.). When the offset function is  
used, the limit is approximately 300 pages. When the limit is reached, copying stops and the [START] key ( ) light  
turns off. Remove the copies from the center tray and then press the [START] key ( ) to resume copying. The  
center tray counter function can be disabled in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
Originals that can be used in the RSPF  
A maximum of 100 sheet originals of equal size (8-1/2" x 11", 24 lbs. (90g/m )) can be placed in the RSPF. Originals  
2
2
of different length can be placed together in the RSPF as long the widths are equal; however, some copy functions  
may not operate correctly.  
Acceptable originals  
2
2
Originals of size 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" having a weight of 9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35g/m to 128g/m ) or 14 lbs. to 28  
lbs. (52g/m to 105g/m ) for two-sided originals can be used.  
2
2
Other considerations  
• Use originals that are within the specified size and weight ranges. Originals outside the specified ranges may  
cause misfeeds.  
• Make sure that there are no paper clips or staples on the original.  
• If an original has damp spots from correction fluid or ink, or glue from pasteups, be sure it has dried completely  
before using it to make a copy. Otherwise the interior of the RSPF or the document glass may become soiled.  
• The following originals cannot be used. These may cause misfeeds, smudging, and unclear images.  
• Transparencies, tracing paper, other transparent or translucent paper, photographs  
• Carbon paper  
• Thermal paper  
• Originals that are creased, folded, or torn  
• Glued originals, cut-out originals  
• Originals with binder holes  
• Originals printed using an ink ribbon (thermal transfer printing), originals printed on thermal transfer paper  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
Copying originals of mixed length (Mixed feeding)  
When using the RSPF, originals of mixed length can be fed together as long as the width of the originals is the same.  
To copy originals of mixed length, follow these steps:  
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.  
Touch the [OK] key.  
1
4
The setting is entered and  
you return to the main  
screen.  
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
The original size icon  
changes to ( ) to indicate  
8½x11  
that mixed feeding is  
selected.  
When copying is started in mixed feeding  
mode, all originals are scanned before  
copying begins.  
Touch the  
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key.  
key and then the  
2
Note  
AL MODES  
ORIGINAL  
SIZE  
COV  
CARD SHOT  
Select the "MIX SIZE ORIGINAL  
FEEDING MODE" checkbox.  
3
ORIGINAL SIZE  
OK  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE  
Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation copying)  
If the originals are placed in a different orientation than the copy paper, the original image will be automatically  
rotated 90°. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable for  
rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size or margin shift copy, rotation will not be  
possible.  
[Example]  
Orientation of  
the placed original  
Orientation of  
the loaded paper  
Copy after rotation  
Face down  
Face down  
• This function operates in both the auto paper select and auto image modes. Rotation copying can be disabled in  
the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
BYPASS FEED (special paper)  
The bypass tray must be used to feed special papers such as transparency film and labels. The bypass tray can also  
be used to feed standard copy paper.  
Place the original(s). (p.23, p.24)  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
1
2
4
Insert the paper (print face down) all  
the way into the bypass tray.  
For paper that can be  
used in the bypass tray,  
see "PAPER" (p.16).  
To load paper, see  
"Loading paper in the  
bypass tray" (p.19).  
LOGOUT  
UT  
2
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key or  
the tray in the image of the machine in  
the touch panel, and select the bypass  
tray.  
3
Set the type of paper that  
EXPOSURE  
you loaded in the bypass  
tray. (p.21)  
AUTO 8½x11  
PAPER SELECT  
100%  
Shifting the starting position of copying  
When copying on a special size of paper in the bypass tray, the starting position of printing can be shifted vertically  
for fine adjustment of the image position. To adjust the starting position of printing, follow the steps below. This  
function can only be used when feeding special sizes of paper from the bypass tray.  
1 Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then touch the [EXTRA  
READY TO COPY.  
0
IMAGE ADJUST] key on the bypass tray.  
OK  
EXTRA IMAGE ADJUST  
2 Use the  
key or  
key to adjust the printing position, and  
then touch the [OK] key.  
(-0.5 0.5)  
inch  
0.00  
• The position can be adjusted from -0.5 inch to +0.5 inch in 0.02  
inch increments.  
TO FRONT TO REAR  
When a setting from -0.5 inch to -0.02 inch is selected, the starting  
position of printing is moved to front from the standard position. When  
a setting from +0.02 inch to +0.5 inch is selected, the starting position  
of printing is moved to rear.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING  
Two originals can be automatically copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. When the RSPF is used,  
two-sided copies of two-sided originals can easily be made.  
Original Paper  
One-sided original Two sides (  
)
Document glass  
One-sided original  
Two-sided original  
Two-sided original  
Two sides  
Two sides  
One side  
(
)
(
)
(
)
RSPF  
• Paper sizes that can be used are 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 14" and 11" x 17" (A5, B5,  
B5R, A4, A4R, B4, and A3).  
Note  
• When making two-sided copies on letterhead paper, place the side with the letterhead face down if using a  
tray, or face up if using the bypass tray (This is the opposite of normal.).  
Automatic two-sided copying is not possible on thick paper, thin paper, labels, transparency film, envelopes, and  
other special types of paper.  
• Automatic two-sided copying can be disabled in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
When dual page copy (p.44) is selected, two-sided original to two sides or two-sided original to one side cannot be used.  
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS  
Touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key when making the tablet  
Place the original on the document  
glass. (p.23)  
1
2
binding, or when making automatic two-sided copies of a  
one-sided 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size portrait original,  
touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.  
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.  
Portrait-oriented original  
(11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size)  
Before [BINDING CHANGE] After [BINDING CHANGE]  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
Touch the [OK] key.  
4
Touch the [One-sided to two-sided  
copy] key.  
3
OK  
BINDG  
CHANGE  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
Make sure that a suitable paper size is  
automatically selected, or select  
another size using the [PAPER  
SELECT] key.  
Remove the first original and then place  
the original for the back side on the  
document glass. Close the RSPF and  
then press the [START] key ( ).  
5
6
7
To cancel automatic  
two-sided copying, press  
the [CLEAR] key ( ).  
EXPOSURE  
AUTO 8½x11  
PAPER SELECT  
100%  
When making two-sided copies of an odd  
number of originals, touch the [READ-END]  
key after scanning the last original.  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
The original for the front  
Note  
2
side is scanned.  
LOGOUT  
UT  
USING THE RSPF  
Place the original(s) in the document  
feeder tray. (p.24)  
Touch the [OK] key.  
1
4
5
OK  
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.  
2
BINDG  
CHANGE  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
Make sure that a suitable paper size is  
automatically selected, or select  
another size using the [PAPER  
SELECT] key.  
Touch the desired copy mode.  
3
EXPOSURE  
AUTO 8½x11  
PAPER SELECT  
100%  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
6
Touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key when making the  
tablet binding, or when making automatic two-sided copies  
of a one-sided 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size portrait  
original, touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.  
Portrait-oriented original  
(11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size)  
Before [BINDING CHANGE] After [BINDING CHANGE]  
LOGOUT  
UT  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT  
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AND  
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE  
[AUTO] is selected by default for automatic adjustment of the exposure according to the original. If you wish to  
specify the original image type or manually adjust the exposure, place the original in the RSPF or on the document  
glass, check the paper size, and then perform the following steps.  
Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.  
Manually adjust the copy exposure.  
1
3
If [TEXT] was selected  
0
for the original image  
type, touch the [AUTO  
MANUAL] key to  
AUTO  
1
3
5
EXPOSURE  
select [MANUAL] and  
then adjust the copy  
exposure.  
AUTO 8½x11  
Touch the  
Touch the  
key to make darker copies.  
key to make lighter copies.  
Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO], or  
[PHOTO] as appropriate for the  
original.  
2
Exposure value guidelines  
1 - 2 Dark originals like newspapers  
Note  
3
Normal originals  
4 - 5 Light colored text or text written in  
pencil  
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE  
TEXT  
AUTO  
TEXT/PHOTO  
To change back to automatic exposure adjustment,  
follow these steps:  
1
3
PHOTO  
1 Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.  
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.  
The [AUTO  
MANUAL] key appears when [TEXT]  
is selected.  
3 Touch the [AUTO  
[AUTO] is highlighted.  
4 Touch the [OK] key.  
Selecting the original image type  
• Three original image type selections are available.  
MANUAL] key so that  
Use for regular text, blueprints,  
TEXT  
and light pencil writing.  
Use for mixed text/photo originals  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Touch the [OK] key.  
4
and printed photos.  
Use for photos and when you  
PHOTO  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
desire clearer halftones.  
Check the paper size, select the  
5
• Automatic exposure adjustment can only be selected  
when [TEXT] is selected for the original image type.  
number of copies and any other  
desired copy settings, and then press  
the [START] key ( ).  
6
LOGOUT  
UT  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM  
There are three ways to enlarge and reduce copies:  
Automatic ratio selection according to the paper size ........................... AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (below)  
Specifying a ratio with the reduce key, enlarge key, or zoom key..................MANUAL RATIO SELECTION (p.32)  
Separately selecting vertical and horizontal ratios ...........................................................XY ZOOM copying (p.33)  
Ratios that can be selected vary depending on the following conditions:  
Original position  
Selectable ratios  
Document glass  
RSPF  
25 to 400%  
50 to 200%  
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION  
The ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and paper size.  
2
Place the original(s). (p.23, p.24)  
• When automatic ratio selection is  
selected, the [AUTO IMAGE] key is  
highlighted in the main screen.  
1
Note  
The original size appears in the touch panel.  
If the original and paper are in different  
orientations, the image is automatically  
rotated to match the paper orientation (for  
paper sizes 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) or less).  
Rotation of the image can be disabled in the  
administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
• If the original size does not appear in the  
touch panel, specify the original size  
manually. (p.48)  
Note  
• Automatic ratio selection is not possible if  
the original or paper is a non-standard  
size.  
• If "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN THE COPY  
PAPER." appears in the touch panel, part  
of the image will be cut off in the copy.  
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and  
then select the desired paper size.  
The selected key is  
2
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired settings, and then press  
the [START] key ( ).  
4
highlighted and the paper  
selection screen closes.  
PLAIN  
8½x11  
8½x
RECYCLED  
LOGOUT  
If paper of the desired size is not loaded in  
any of the trays, load paper of the required  
size in a paper tray or in the bypass tray.  
(p.19)  
Note  
UT  
To cancel automatic ratio selection, touch  
Note  
the [AUTO IMAGE] key. Automatic ratio  
selection also turns off automatically when  
the enlargement key, the reduction key, or a  
Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.  
3
A suitable ratio is  
selected based on the  
original size and selected  
paper size. (The ratio  
appears in the touch  
panel.)  
[ZOOM] key  
the ratio to be selected.  
(
/
)
is touched to allow  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
MANUAL RATIO SELECTION  
There are four preset reduction ratios and four preset enlargement ratios.  
In addition, the [ZOOM] keys (  
,
) can be pressed to select the ratio in increments of 1%.  
Place the original(s). (p.23, p.24)  
Use the enlargement key or reduction  
1
2
4
key, or the [ZOOM] key (  
the desired copy ratio.  
/
) to set  
Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.  
100  
%
1
ZOOM  
PAPER SELECT  
8½x11  
5½x8½  
11x17  
8½x14  
8½x14  
8½x11  
64%  
77%  
11x17  
8½x11  
8½x11  
5½x8½  
11x17  
ZOOM  
121%  
12
100%  
1
2
MENU  
COPY RATIO  
The [ZOOM] keys  
) can be used to  
(
/
77  
%
ZOOM  
Use the [MENU] key to select menu  
change the ratio in  
increments of 1%  
3
1x17  
½x11  
8½x11  
5½x8½  
11x17  
8½x14  
8½x14  
8½x11  
[
] or menu [ ] for copy ratio  
4%  
77  
Touch the  
key to  
11x17  
8½x11  
8½x11  
5½x8½  
½x14  
11x17  
121%  
129  
selection.  
increase the ratio or the  
key to decrease the  
ratio. Continuing to touch  
XY ZOOM  
MENU  
1
2
Menu  
READY TO COPY.  
a [ZOOM] key (  
makes the ratio change  
faster.  
/
)
0
OK  
AUTO  
100  
ZOOM  
%
EXPOSURE  
AUTO  
8½x11  
100%  
11x17  
8½x11  
8½x11  
5½x8½  
11x17  
8½x14  
8½x14  
8½x11  
64%  
77%  
PAPER SELECT  
Touch a reduction or enlargement key to  
set the approximate ratio, then touch the  
11x17  
8½x11  
8½x11  
5½x8½  
8½x14  
11x17  
Note  
121%  
129%  
AUTO  
IMAGE  
COPY RATIO  
XY ZOOM  
MENU  
1
2
[
[
] key to decrease the ratio or the  
] key to increase the ratio.  
• If "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN THE COPY  
PAPER." appears, the selected copy ratio  
is too large for the paper size. However, if  
you press the [START] key ( ), a copy  
will be made.  
Preset reduction keys :  
Preset enlargement keys : 121%, 129%  
64%, 77%  
• [100%] key  
100%  
Menu  
Touch the [OK] key.  
5
READY TO COPY.  
0
OK  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
100  
ZOOM  
%
OK  
%
AUTO  
8½x11  
EX  
100%  
25%  
50%  
200%  
400%  
PAPER SELECT  
AUTO  
10
x17  
x14  
8½x14  
8½x11  
AUTO  
IMAGE  
77%  
PAPE  
COPY RATIO  
11x17  
8½x11  
x11  
x8½  
1
2
XY ZOOM  
MENU  
129%  
AUTO  
IMAGE  
COP  
1
2
Preset reduction keys :  
Preset enlargement keys : 200%, 400%  
100%  
25%, 50%  
• [100%] key  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
Make sure that a suitable paper size is  
automatically selected, or select  
another size using the [PAPER  
SELECT] key.  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
6
7
If AUTO PAPER  
EXPOSURE  
SELECT is enabled, the  
appropriate copy paper  
size is automatically  
AUTO 8½x11  
LOGOUT  
PAPER SELECT  
selected based on the  
UT  
original size and selected  
77%  
copy ratios.  
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the  
[COPY RATIO] key to display the ratio menu  
Note  
and then touch the [100%] key. (p.32, step  
3)  
2
SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL COPY  
RATIOS SEPARATELY (XY ZOOM copying)  
The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed independently.  
Example: Vertical ratio set to 100% and horizontal ratio set to 50%.  
Original  
Copy  
• The AUTO IMAGE/MULTI SHOT/PAMPHLET COPY feature cannot be used in combination with the XY ZOOM  
function.  
Note  
To use the XY ZOOM feature with the DUAL PAGE COPY feature (p.44), set the DUAL PAGE COPY feature  
first and then the XY ZOOM feature.  
Place the original(s). (p.23, p.24)  
Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.  
1
2
3
8½x11  
5½x8½  
11x1  
8½x1  
11x17  
8½x11  
64%  
Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.  
8½x1  
5½x8  
8½x14  
11x17  
121%  
1
PAPER SELECT  
XY ZOOM  
MENU  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPY FUNCTIONS  
Touch the [X] key.  
Use the reduction, enlargement, and  
4
5
7
[ZOOM] keys (  
/
) to change the  
The [X] key is selected  
(highlighted) by default,  
so there is normally no  
need to perform this step  
(Go to step 5.).  
If the [X] key is not  
highlighted, perform this  
step.  
copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.  
1
2
4
X
100  
100  
A fixed ratio key will not  
become highlighted  
when touched.  
77%  
64%  
50%  
X
Y
ZOOM  
X
Y
50  
70  
If you need to readjust  
the horizontal ratio, touch  
the [X] key again.  
Use the reduction, enlargement, and  
[ZOOM] keys ( ) to change the  
/
copy ratio in the horizontal (X)  
direction.  
ZOOM  
A fixed ratio key will not  
become highlighted  
when touched.  
CANCEL  
ZOOM  
64%  
50%  
Y
Touch the [OK] key.  
8
Y ZOOM  
OK  
129%  
E
The [ZOOM] keys  
200%  
(
/
) can be used to  
100%  
4%  
Y
100  
PAP  
change the ratio in  
increments of 1%  
400%  
ZOOM  
0%  
Touch the  
key to  
increase the ratio, or the  
key to decrease the  
ratio. Continuing to touch  
CANCEL  
XY ZOOM  
Make sure that a suitable paper size is  
automatically selected, or select  
another size using the [PAPER  
SELECT] key.  
9
a [ZOOM] key (  
/
)
makes the ratio change  
faster.  
If AUTO PAPER  
EXPOSURE  
SELECT is enabled, the  
appropriate copy paper  
size is automatically  
Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set  
the approximate ratio, then touch the [  
Note  
]
AUTO 8½x11  
key to decrease the ratio or the [  
increase the ratio.  
] key to  
PAPER SELECT  
selected based on the  
original size and selected  
X-50% Y-70%  
copy ratios.  
Touch the [Y] key.  
6
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
10  
X
Y
50  
100  
OM  
To cancel this function, touch the [CANCEL]  
key in the XY ZOOM screen.  
Note  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN  
A copy run can be temporarily interrupted to allow another copy job to be performed. When the other job is finished,  
the copy run will resume using the original copy settings.  
Automatic two-sided copying, sort/group copying, staple sort, pamphlet copy, job build, cover copy, job build, job  
programs, card shot, or multi shot copying cannot be used for interrupt copying.  
Note  
Press the [INTERRUPT] key ( ) to  
interrupt the copy run.  
When the copy job is finished, press  
the [INTERRUPT] key ( ) and remove  
the original(s).  
1
4
5
The [INTERRUPT] key  
( ) blinks until the  
machine is ready for the  
interrupt job, after which  
it lights steadily.  
2
If you decide to cancel  
the interrupt job while  
selecting settings, press  
the [INTERRUPT] key  
( ).  
Replace the previous original(s) and  
press the [START] key ( ) to resume  
copying.  
• If audit mode is enabled, a message will  
appear prompting you to enter your  
Note  
account number. Enter your account  
number with the numeric keys. The copies  
that you make will be added to your  
account’s count.  
Replace only the originals that have not yet been  
scanned.  
• If an original is being scanned when the  
[INTERRUPT] key ( ) is pressed, the  
interrupt job will begin after the original is  
scanned. If a copy is being printed, the  
interrupt job will begin after the copy is  
printed.  
Remove the previous original(s) and  
place the original(s) of the interrupt  
copy job. (p.23, p.24)  
2
3
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
When the finisher is  
installed, the interrupt  
copies will be offset from  
the previous copies.  
(Offset function, p.36)  
LOGOUT  
UT  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
3
This chapter explains special finishing functions and other convenient functions.  
COPY FINISHING FUNCTIONS  
This section explains the sort, group, and offset functions, as well as the staple sort function which is used to staple  
output collated with the sort function when a finisher is installed.  
SORT COPY  
This function is used to collate sets of copies. Copies  
can be output to the job separator tray, or the offset  
tray or right tray (output tray unit) of the peripheral  
finisher.  
GROUP COPY  
This function is used to group sets of copies by page.  
Copies can be output to the job separator tray, or the  
offset tray or right tray (output tray unit) of the  
peripheral finisher.  
3
2
3
2
1
1
OFFSET FUNCTION  
(When the finisher is  
installed)  
Each set of copies is offset from the previous set in the  
output tray, making it easy to distinguish one set from  
another.  
Offset function "ON"  
Offset function "OFF"  
Enabling the offset function  
The offset function operates when a checkmark  
appears in the [OFFSET] checkbox, which is displayed  
by touching the [OUTPUT] key. (If a checkmark does  
not appear, touch the checkbox.)  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
Place the originals in the RSPF or on  
the document glass. (p.23, p.24)  
Touch the [OK] key.  
1
5
6
If originals are placed in  
the RSPF, the sort  
function is automatically  
selected. (To disable this  
function, see the "6.  
OK  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
OFFSET  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
Example: 5 sets of copies or 5 copies per page of 3  
originals  
Originals  
Touch the [OUTPUT] key.  
2
LOGOUT  
UT  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
3
[When using the RSPF:]  
Copying will start after all the originals are  
scanned.  
7
[When using the document glass:]  
Replace the original with the next original and  
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step until  
all originals have been scanned, and then touch  
the [READ-END] key.  
Touch the [SORT] or [GROUP] key.  
3
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].  
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].  
READ-END  
Touch the output tray that you wish to  
4
The copies are grouped as follows:  
Sort Group  
use.  
The output tray can only  
UPPER  
TRAY  
Copy  
Copy  
be selected when a job  
separator or finisher is  
installed.  
CENTER  
TRAY  
5 sets of copies  
5 copies per page  
To enable the offset function (p.36), touch the  
If the memory becomes full while scanning the  
originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO  
BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear.  
To copy only the originals that have been scanned,  
press the [START] key ( ) . To cancel the job, press  
the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
Note  
[OFFSET] checkbox so that a checkmark  
appears. To disable the offset function, touch  
the [OFFSET] checkbox again to clear the  
checkmark.  
The number of originals that can be scanned into  
Note  
memory can be increased by increasing the  
memory allocation in the administrator settings, or  
by installing more memory. (See "6. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
STAPLE SORT  
(when the finisher (MX-FN13) is installed)  
This function collates the copies, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the offset tray. The staple sort function  
can only be used when a finisher is installed.  
Stapling position  
Portrait orientation  
Landscape orientation  
Available paper sizes:  
8-1/2" x 11" (A4, B5)  
Stapling capacity:  
For each size, up to 50 sheets  
can be stapled.  
Available paper sizes:  
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",  
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11" R  
(A3, B4, A4R, B5R)  
Top left corner  
Stapling capacity:  
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",  
8-1/2" x 13" (A3, B4)  
For each size, up to 30 sheets  
can be stapled.  
8-1/2" x 11"R, (A4R, B5R)  
For each size, up to 50 sheets  
can be stapled.  
ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL AND STAPLING  
POSITIONS  
Using the RSPF  
Using the document glass  
Insert the originals face up.  
Place each original face down.  
Stapling position  
Stapling position  
When copying 8-1/2" x 14" or 11" x 17" (B4 or A3) vertically oriented originals, the copies will be stapled at the  
position shown below.  
Stapling position  
Stapling position  
Document glass  
RSPF  
• When using letterhead paper in the staple sort, load the paper with the letterhead to  
the front or to the right as shown in the diagram.  
Note  
S H A
• When the staple sort is used, the automatic original image rotation function does not operate.  
• Different sized originals cannot be copied on the corresponding sizes of paper.  
• The staple sort function cannot be used if disabled in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR).)  
• The offset function (p.36) cannot be used.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
Place the original(s). (p.23, p.24)  
Touch the [OUTPUT] key.  
[When using the RSPF:]  
Copying will start after all originals have been  
scanned.  
[When using the document glass:]  
Replace the original with the next original and  
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step until  
all originals have been scanned, and then touch  
the [READ-END] key.  
1
2
6
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].  
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].  
READ-END  
Touch the [STAPLE SORT] key.  
3
If the memory becomes full while scanning the  
originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO  
BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear.  
To copy only the originals that have been scanned,  
press the [START] key ( ). To cancel the job, press  
the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
When the [STAPLE  
SORT] key is selected,  
the offset tray is  
automatically selected as  
the output tray. The top  
tray and center tray  
cannot be used.  
3
The number of originals that can be scanned  
Note  
into memory can be increased by increasing  
the memory allocation in the administrator  
settings, or by installing more memory. (See  
"6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR).)  
Touch the [OK] key.  
4
5
Select the number of copies and other  
copy settings, and then press the  
[START] key ( ).  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
When the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode is touched, the special modes screen will  
appear. This screen contains the following special function keys.  
1
2
7
8
[MARGIN SHIFT] key (p.42)  
Use this to shift the image on the copy paper to  
create binding margins.  
(
) key, ( ) key  
Use these to change pages in the special functions  
screen.  
[ERASE] key (p.43)  
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key (p.48)  
Use this to erase peripheral shadows that occur  
when making copies of books and other thick  
originals.  
Use to manually select the original size. When the  
original size is selected, the auto ratio select  
function will automatically select an appropriate  
ratio based on the paper size.  
3
4
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key (p.44)  
Use this to make separate copies of the left and  
right pages of bound documents.  
9
[COVER] key (p.49)  
Press this to use a different type of paper for front  
and back covers (When the RSPF is used.).  
[PAMPHLET COPY] key (p.45)  
10  
11  
[B/W REVERSE] key (p.51)  
Use to reverse black and white areas.  
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange  
copies in the proper order for center-stapling and  
folding into a booklet. Two original pages are  
copied onto each side of the paper, such that a  
total of four pages are copied onto one sheet.  
[CARD SHOT] key (p.52)  
The front and reverse sides of a card can be  
copied onto one sheet of paper.  
5
6
[JOB BUILD] key (p.46)  
12  
[OK] key  
Use this when you need to copy more originals  
than can be placed in the RSPF at once. This  
allows you to divide the originals into sets and  
scan them sequentially in the RSPF.  
Touch to return to the main screen of the copy  
mode.  
Some functions cannot be used in  
[MULTI SHOT] key (p.47)  
Note  
combination with each other. If a prohibited  
combination of functions has been selected, a  
message will appear in the touch panel.  
The multi shot copy function is used to copy two or  
four originals onto one sheet of copy paper in any  
of four layout patterns.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING THE SPECIAL  
FUNCTIONS  
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.  
1
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
Touch the key of the desired special  
mode.  
2
Example:  
Selecting the margin shift  
function  
MARGIN SHIFT  
3
PAMPHLET COPY  
Procedures for modes that require further settings  
are explained starting on the next page.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
MARGIN SHIFT COPY  
The margin shift function is used to automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 1/2" in its  
initial setting.  
• Right, left or down can be  
selected for the shift direction  
as shown in the illustration.  
Image shifted  
down  
Image shifted  
to the right  
Image shifted  
to the left  
One-sided copying  
Margin  
• The shift width (margin) can  
be set from 0" to 1" in  
increments of 1/8".  
Margin  
Margin  
• If [DOWN] key is selected, set  
the original(s) so that the  
margin to be increased is set  
to the rear side of the RSPF  
or the document glass.  
Two-sided copying  
Image shifted  
to the right  
Image shifted  
to the left  
Image shifted  
down  
Margin  
Or  
Margin  
Margin  
Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key in the  
special modes screen.  
Adjust the shift width as needed and  
touch the [OK] key.  
1
2
3
The margin shift setting  
screen will appear.  
The margin shift icon  
Use the  
and  
keys  
OK  
to set the shift width. The  
shift amount can be set  
from 0" to 1" in  
CANCEL  
OK  
MARGIN SHIFT  
SIDE 1  
SIDE 2  
(
, etc.) will also  
(0 1)  
inch  
(0
1/2  
inch  
1/2  
appear in the screen to  
indicate that the function  
is turned on.  
increments of 1/8".  
PAMPHLET COPY  
Select the shift direction.  
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes screen.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
4
Touch the [RIGHT],  
[LEFT], or [DOWN] key.  
The selected key will be  
highlighted.  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
DOWN  
About the steps that follow  
If you are using the document glass, see page 23.  
If you are using the RSPF, see page 24.  
• When margin shift is selected, rotation  
copying will not function.  
Note  
• This feature cannot be used with paper that  
is not a standard size.  
To cancel the margin shift function, touch  
the [CANCEL] key in the margin shift  
setting screen. (See the screen of step 3.)  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
ERASE COPY  
The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies that are produced when copying thick originals or  
books. The erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is initially set to 1/2".  
EDGE ERASE  
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies  
caused when heavy paper or a book is copied.  
CENTER ERASE  
Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings of  
bound documents.  
EDGE + CENTER ERASE  
Eliminates both the shadow lines around the edges of  
copies and the shadow at the center.  
3
Touch the [ERASE] key in the special  
modes screen.  
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes screen.  
1
4
The erase setting screen  
will appear.  
The erase icon ( , etc.)  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
FT  
ERASE  
About the steps that follow  
If the document glass is being used, see page 23.  
will also appear in the  
screen to indicate that  
the function is turned on.  
JOB  
BUILD  
If the RSPF is being used, see page 24.  
PY  
MU  
• This feature cannot be used with  
non-standard size originals.  
Note  
Select the desired erase mode.  
• This feature cannot be selected when  
mixed feeding (p.26) is used.  
To cancel the erase copy function, touch the  
[CANCEL] key in the erase setting screen.  
(See the screen of step 3.)  
2
Select one of the three  
ERASE  
erase modes. The  
selected key will be  
highlighted.  
EDGE  
ERASE  
CENTER  
ERASE  
EDGE+CENTER  
ERASE  
Adjust the erase width as needed and  
touch the [OK] key.  
3
Use the  
and  
keys  
CANCEL  
EDGE  
OK  
to adjust the erase width.  
The erase width can be  
set from 0" to 1" in  
(0 1)  
inch  
1/2  
increments of 1/8".  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
DUAL PAGE COPY  
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two adjoining pages on the document glass. It is  
especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.  
[Example] Copying the right and left pages of a book  
• A reduction setting can be selected when using  
Book original  
Dual page copy  
the dual page copy function, however, an  
enlargement setting cannot be selected.  
• The dual page copy function can only be used  
when copying from the document glass. The  
RSPF cannot be used.  
• Only 8-1/2" x 11" paper can be used.  
When copying book originals:  
When copying a thick book, press down gently on the  
book to flatten it against the document glass.  
Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key in  
the special modes screen.  
1
2
3
The [DUAL PAGE  
COPY] key is highlighted  
to indicate that the  
function is enabled, and  
the dual page copy icon  
1/2  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
MULTI SHOT  
(
) will appear in the  
screen.  
Make sure that 8-1/2" x 11" size paper  
4
is selected.  
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes screen.  
If 8-1/2" x 11" size paper  
is not selected, touch the  
[PAPER SELECT] key to  
select 8-1/2" x 11" paper.  
AUTO 8½x11  
PAPER SELECT  
You will return to the  
main screen of copy  
mode.  
0
OK  
100%  
/2  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
5
Place the originals on the document  
glass. (p.23)  
LOGOUT  
81/2x11  
Index  
This page  
is copied  
first.  
UT  
Center line of  
original  
To cancel the dual page copy function,  
Note  
touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key in the  
special modes screen. (The key will no  
longer be highlighted.) (See the screen of  
step 1.)  
To erase shadows caused by the document  
binding, use the edge erase function (p.43).  
(Center Erase and Edge + Center Erase  
cannot be used with the dual page copy  
function.)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
PAMPHLET COPY  
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in the proper order for center-stapling and folding into a  
booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of the copy paper, such that a total of four pages are copied  
onto each sheet.  
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.  
[Example]: Copying 8 originals with pamphlet copy  
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the  
last page. The order of copying will be automatically  
adjusted by the machine.  
Originals (one-sided)  
The finished copies  
can be folded.  
1
2
• Either left binding (opening from right to left) or right  
binding (opening from left to right) can be selected.  
3
4
5
6
7
• Four originals will be copied onto one sheet. Blank  
pages may be automatically added at the end,  
depending on the number of the originals.  
First page  
8
Originals (two-sided)  
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
First page  
3
Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key in  
the special modes menu screen.  
The pamphlet copy  
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes screen.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
1
4
MARGIN SHIFT  
setting screen will  
Place the original(s). (p.23, p.24)  
appear. The pamphlet  
copy icon ( , etc.) will  
also appear in the upper  
left corner of the screen  
to indicate that the  
5
PAMPHLET COPY  
Make sure that a suitable paper size  
has been automatically selected.  
6
If the desired copy paper  
function is enabled.  
size is not selected, use  
the [PAPER SELECT] key  
to select the paper size.  
AUTO 11x17  
PAPER SELECT  
Specify whether 1-sided or 2-sided  
originals will be copied.  
2
After the paper size is  
CANCEL  
OK  
selected, touch the [AUTO  
IMAGE] key. A suitable  
ratio will be automatically  
selected.  
PAMPHLET COPY  
100%  
ORIGINAL  
1-SIDED 2-SIDED  
LEFT  
BINDING  
RIGHT  
BINDING  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
7
Select the binding position ([LEFT  
BINDING] or [RIGHT BINDING]) and  
then touch the [OK] key in the  
pamphlet copy setting screen.  
You will return to the  
3
[When using the RSPF:]  
Copying will start after all originals have been  
scanned.  
8
[When using the document glass:]  
9
CANCEL  
OK  
special modes menu  
screen.  
Replace the original with the next original and  
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step until  
all originals have been scanned, and then touch  
the [READ-END] key.  
LEFT  
BINDING  
RI
BINDING  
D
When the pamphlet copy function is selected,  
two-sided copying will be automatically enabled.  
To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch  
the [CANCEL] key in the pamphlet copy  
Note  
setting screen. (See the screen of step 2.)  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
JOB BUILD MODE  
Use this function when you need to copy more originals than can be placed in the RSPF at once. (The maximum  
number of originals that can be placed in the RSPF at once is 100.)  
• If the memory becomes full while scanning the originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO BEGIN  
COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear. To copy only the originals that have been scanned, press the  
[START] key ( ) . To cancel the job, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
Note  
Depending on the content of the originals, the memory may become full before 100 originals have been scanned. In  
this case, press the [START] key ( ) to copy the originals that have been scanned, and then place the originals that  
weren’t scanned in the RSPF once again and repeat the copy procedure.  
To increase the number of originals that can be scanned, install more memory or increase the memory  
allocation in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
Example: Copying 130 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" size originals)  
Originals  
page 1  
page 101  
100 sheets  
30 sheets  
* Divide the originals into sets so that each set is no more than  
100 pages. Scan the sets in order beginning from the first  
page of set A.  
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key in the  
special modes menu screen.  
Make sure that a suitable paper size is  
selected, select the number of copies  
and any other desired copy settings,  
and then press the [START] key ( ) .  
1
4
The [JOB BUILD] key is  
highlighted.  
D
T
ERASE  
The job build copy icon  
Scanning begins. When  
scanning of the first set  
of originals (A in the  
above example) is  
(
) will also appear in  
JOB  
BUILD  
Y
MUL  
the screen to indicate  
that the function is  
enabled.  
LOGOUT  
finished, insert the  
second set and press the  
[START] key ( ).  
UT  
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes screen.  
2
3
Repeat this step until all the remaining originals (B in  
the above example) have been scanned.  
Remove each scanned set of originals before inserting  
the next set.  
You will return to the  
OK  
main screen of copy  
mode.  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
ERASE  
JOB  
BUILD  
MULTI SHOT  
Touch the [READ-END] key.  
5
Copying begins.  
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].  
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].  
Place the original(s) in the RSPF.  
(p.24)  
READ-END  
To cancel the job build mode function, touch  
Note  
the [JOB BUILD] key in the special modes  
screen so that it is no longer highlighted.  
(See the screen of step 1.)  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
MULTI SHOT COPY  
The multi shot copy function is used to copy two or four originals onto one sheet of copy paper in a specified order.  
Example: Copying four originals onto one sheet of paper  
(Page number: 4 in 1 ( ), layout: ( ))  
• When using the multi shot copy function, place the  
originals, select the desired paper size, and select  
the copy mode before selecting the multi shot copy  
function in the special modes screen.  
One-sided copy of  
one-sided original  
When using the multi shot copy function, the  
appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based  
on the original size, paper size, and the number of  
originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum  
reduction ratio is 25%. (The minimum ratio is 50% when  
the RSPF is used.) Depending on the original size,  
paper size, and the number of originals to be copied  
onto one sheet, portions of original images may be cut  
off.  
Copy  
One-sided copy of  
two-sided original  
Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the  
SPECIAL MODES menu screen.  
The multi shot copy  
Select a borderline setting.  
1
2
4
3
Select [  
].  
], [ ], or  
OK  
CANCEL  
1/2  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
[
setting screen will  
LAYOUT  
BORDER  
appear. The multi shot  
copy icon ( , etc.) will  
also appear in the screen  
to indicate that the  
MULTI SHOT  
function is enabled.  
Touch the [OK] key in the multi shot  
setting screen.  
You will return to the special modes menu screen.  
5
6
7
Select the number of originals to be  
copied onto one sheet in the multi  
shot copy selection screen.  
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes menu screen.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
OK  
CANCEL  
MULTI SHOT  
LAYOUT  
BORDER  
2in1  
4in1  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
Select the layout.  
[When using the RSPF:]  
Copying will start after all originals have been  
scanned.  
3
8
9
Select the order in which  
the originals will appear  
on the copy.  
OK  
CANCEL  
[When using the document glass:]  
LAYOUT  
BORDER  
Replace the original with the next original and  
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step until  
all originals have been scanned, and then touch  
the [READ-END] key if necessary.  
• The images may be rotated depending on  
the number of originals and the orientation  
of the originals and copy paper.  
Note  
To cancel the multi shot copy function,  
touch the [CANCEL] key in the multi shot  
setting screen (the screen of step 2) .  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
ORIGINAL SIZE  
If you wish to use the paper other than the automatically selected original size, original size setting is specified by  
the special modes. The mix feeding setting (p.26) is also selected here.  
Touch the  
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key in the special  
modes menu screen.  
key and then touch the  
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes menu screen.  
You will return to the main screen of the copy  
mode.  
1
5
The original size setting  
screen will appear.  
AL MODES  
To select mixed feeding, select the "MIX SIZE  
ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE" checkbox.  
Note  
ORIGINAL  
SIZE  
COV  
Mixed feeding is explained on page 26.  
CARD SHOT  
Touch the [MANUAL] key.  
2
GINAL SIZE  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MOD  
Select the original size.  
3
ORIGINAL SIZE  
OK  
OK  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
8½x11R  
5½x8½  
8½x14  
8½x11  
11x17  
8½x13  
AB  
INCH  
[MANUAL] key is highlighted and the selected paper  
size is displayed.  
To select an AB size original, touch the  
Note  
[AB  
INCH] key. AB sizes will appear.  
Touch the inside [OK] key.  
4
You will return to the special modes menu  
screen.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
COVER COPY  
Cover copy mode is used to add a cover to the front or back, or both the front and back, of a multipage document.  
To use cover copy mode, the RSPF must be used.  
Copying onto a cover  
Not copying onto a cover  
One-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals  
One-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals  
One-sided originals  
One-sided copies  
(copying onto a cover)  
One-sided originals  
One-sided copies  
(not copying onto a cover)  
4
3
4
2
1
3
4
4
3
2
1
3
2
Back cover  
2
Back cover  
(no copying)  
1
1
SHARP  
SHARP  
Cover original  
Front cover  
(can copy onto front side)  
Two-sided originals  
Front cover  
(not copying onto a cover)  
3
1
Two-sided originals  
5
4
2
4
3
2
Back cover  
(no copying)  
1
SHARP  
3
SHARP  
Two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals  
Cover original  
Front cover  
(can copy onto front side)  
One-sided originals  
One-sided copies  
(not copying onto a cover)  
4
Two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals  
3
2
1
One-sided originals  
Two-sided copies  
(copying onto a cover)  
4
3
Back cover  
3
2
1
1
Back cover  
(no copying)  
Two-sided originals  
SHARP  
3
1
3
1
Cover original  
Front cover  
Two-sided originals  
SHARP  
3
1
Front cover  
• A front cover, back cover, or both a front and a  
back cover can be selected.  
(can copy onto front side)  
(Back side of cover is blank.)  
SHARP  
Cover original  
• A front cover, back cover, or both a front and a  
back cover can be selected.  
• You can specify whether or not the front cover is  
copied on.  
• Copying is not possible on either side of a back  
cover.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
Touch the  
[COVER] key in the special modes  
menu screen.  
key and then touch the  
Load the cover paper to be used into  
the bypass tray.  
1
6
Load the same size of  
paper as the paper to  
be used for the copy  
job.  
The cover setting screen  
will appear.  
The cover icon ( , etc.)  
will also appear in the  
screen to indicate that  
the function is turned on.  
L
COVER  
OT  
About the steps that follow  
See page 24.  
Select the cover(s) that you wish to  
add.  
2
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
COVER  
FRONT  
• It is not possible to copy on the inside of a  
front cover, nor on either side of a back  
cover.  
Note  
CANCEL  
OK  
BACK  
FRONT+BACK  
PRINT ON FRONT COVER?  
NO  
YES  
• Be sure to place the originals in the RSPF.  
The document glass cannot be used for this  
function.  
During cover copying, stream feeding mode  
will not function even if enabled in the  
administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
To add only a front cover, touch the [FRONT] key. To  
add only a back cover, touch the [BACK] key. To add  
both a front and back cover, touch the  
[FRONT+BACK] key.  
To cancel the cover copy function, select  
the cover copy function again and touch the  
[CANCEL] key. (See the screen of step 2.)  
Specify whether or not the front cover  
3
is to be copied on.  
CANCEL  
OK  
Select [YES] or [NO] in  
the touch panel. If  
[YES] is selected, the  
first page of the  
CK  
PRINT ON FRONT COVER?  
NO  
YES  
document will be  
copied onto the front  
cover sheet.  
Touch the [OK] key in the cover  
setting screen.  
Return to the special modes screen.  
4
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes screen.  
5
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
B/W REVERSE COPY  
The B/W REVERSE feature is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image.  
original  
B/W reverse copy  
• When the B/W reverse function is selected, the  
exposure mode will be automatically set to TEXT  
mode. Other exposure modes cannot be selected. If  
B/W reverse is canceled, TEXT mode will not  
automatically be canceled.  
Touch the  
[B/W REVERSE] key in the special  
modes menu screen.  
key and then touch the  
1
The [B/W REVERSE]  
key is highlighted.  
The B/W reverse icon  
B/W  
REVERSE  
OVER  
(
) will also appear in  
the screen to indicate  
that the function is  
enabled.  
3
Touch the [OK] key in the special  
modes screen.  
2
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
About the steps that follow  
If the document glass is being used, see page 23.  
If the RSPF is being used, see page 24.  
To cancel the B/W reverse copy function,  
Note  
touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the special  
modes screen. (The key will no longer be  
highlighted.) (See the screen of step 1.)  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
CARD SHOT  
The front and back of a card can be copied onto one sheet of paper.  
This function is convenient for making copies for certification purposes and helps save paper.  
• Copying is only possible on standard size paper.  
• The image cannot be rotated when using this  
function.  
Original  
CARD  
Copy  
CARD  
Front of  
card  
CARD  
Back of  
card  
Example:  
Portrait  
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)  
size  
Example:  
Landscape  
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)  
size  
Make sure that a suitable paper size is  
selected, or select another size using  
the [PAPER SELECT] key.  
Enter the X dimension (width) and Y  
dimension (length) of the original card  
1
2
3
with the  
keys.  
EXPOSURE  
CANCEL  
OK  
SIZE RESET  
AUTO 8½x11  
PAPER SELECT  
FIT TO  
PAGE  
100%  
• X (width) is initially selected. Enter X dimension  
and then touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y  
dimension.  
• To change the X or Y value back to the default  
value, touch the [SIZE RESET] key. The default  
values can be changed in the administrator  
settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR).)  
• To have the images enlarged or reduced by a  
suitable ratio based on the entered original size  
so that the front and back sides fit into the  
selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE]  
key.  
Touch the  
key and then touch the  
[CARD SHOT] key in the special  
modes screen.  
The CARD SHOT setting  
ORIGINAL  
SIZE  
COVER  
screen will appear. A  
card shot icon ( ) will  
also appear in the upper  
left corner of the screen  
to indicate that the  
CARD SHOT  
function is turned on.  
Touch the outer [OK] key.  
4
You will return to the  
OK  
main screen of copy  
mode.  
CANCEL  
SIZE RESET  
FIT TO  
PAGE  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS  
Place the original on the document  
glass.  
5
6
Place the front side of the  
original face down and  
close the document  
cover/RSPF.  
Select the number of copies and any  
other desired copy settings, and then  
press the [START] key ( ).  
The front side of the card  
is scanned.  
LOGOUT  
UT  
Place the back side of the original  
face down on the document glass.  
7
8
3
Press the [START] key ( ).  
The back side of the card  
is scanned and copying  
begins.  
• The original must be placed on the  
document glass. The RSPF cannot be  
used.  
Note  
• Even when [FIT TO PAGE] is selected,  
you can touch the [COPY RATIO] key in  
the main screen of copy mode to manually  
select the ratio.  
To cancel the card shot function, touch the  
[CANCEL] key in the card shot setting  
screen (the screen of step 4).  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
4
INTRODUCTION  
The network scanner expansion Kit enables the machine to be used as a network scanner.  
• To enable the network scanner function of this machine, a product key (password) must be entered using a  
administrator setting. This is only required once. Use the "PRODUCT KEY" program to enter the product key. If  
you do not know your product key, please ask your dealer. (For information on using administrator settings, refer  
to "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
• The printer expansion kit (MX-PB12) and at least 128 MB of memory* are required to use the network scanner  
function.  
• For the procedures for using the software programs, see the user's guides on the CD-ROM.  
* Memory can be added by installing a commercially available 128 MB or 256 MB memory module (144-pin SDRAM  
SODIMM). For more information, consult your dealer.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER  
FUNCTION  
When the network scanner function is added to the machine, a document or photo can be scanned into an image file  
and sent over a network or the Internet to a file server, e-mail destination, or your own computer. The scanned  
image can be sent to the following types of destinations:  
1. The scanned image can be sent to a memory  
storage device on a network (a designated  
directory on an FTP server). (This is called  
"Scan to FTP" in this manual.)  
When sending scanned image to an FTP  
server, an e-mail message can also be sent to a  
preset e-mail address to inform the recipient of  
the location of the scanned image data. (This is  
called "Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)" in this  
manual.)  
2. A scanned image can be sent to a computer  
connected to the same network as the  
machine. (This is called "Scan to Desktop" in  
this manual.)  
* Before Scan to Desktop can be performed, the  
"Network Scanner Tool" software in the  
CD-ROM that accompanied the Network  
Scanner Expansion Kit (MX-NSX1) must be  
installed. For information on Scan to Desktop  
system requirements, installing the Network  
Scanner Tool, and storing the destination, see  
the Users Guide for the Network Scanner Tool  
on the CD-ROM that accompanies the network  
scanner expansion kit.  
4
3. The scanned image can be sent to an e-mail  
recipient. (This is called "Scan to E-mail" in  
this manual.)  
* A limit is set in the Web page for the size of  
image files that can be sent using Scan to  
E-mail (p.58).  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING  
REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK  
SCANNER FEATURE  
To use the Network Scanner feature, settings for the SMTP server, DNS server, and destination addresses must be  
established.  
To establish the settings, use a computer that is connected to the same network as the machine to access the  
machine's Web page.  
SETTINGS REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
To use transmit images using the network scanner function, configure the settings in the Web pages as follows:  
Scan to FTP  
Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)  
Scan to E-mail  
Scan to Desktop  
Access the Web pages (see below)  
Configure basic settings for network scanning (p.58)  
Configure your SMTP and DNS server settings (p.59)  
Configure LDAP server settings  
(when using an LDAP server) (p.60)  
Store destination information (p.62 to 65)  
Store your sender information (p.67)  
The following settings can also be configured to enable convenient use of the network scanner function:  
• Programming custom index names. (p.61)  
• Setting passwords. (p.68)  
ACCESSING WEB PAGES  
Use the following procedure to access the Web pages.  
Open the Web browser on your  
computer.  
In the "Address" field of your Web  
browser, enter the IP address of the  
machine as a URL.  
1
2
Supported browsers:  
Internet Explorer:  
Netscape Navigator: 9 or later (Windows )  
®
6.0 or later (Windows )  
Enter the IP address that  
has been programmed in  
the machine.  
If you do not know the IP  
address, see page 89.  
®
®
Firefox:  
Safari:  
2.0 or later (Windows )  
1.5 or later (Macintosh)  
When the connection is completed, the Web  
page will appear in your Web browser. (p.57)  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE  
When you access the Web page in the machine, the following page will appear in your browser.  
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the  
right frame that allows you to establish settings for that item.  
For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.  
1
2
3
4
4
5
1
Menu frame  
Click the menu items displayed here to configure the corresponding settings.  
2
Destination (p.62)  
Set up destinations for Scan to FTP, Scan to FTP (Hyperlink), Scan to Desktop, and Scan to E-mail. You can also  
edit or delete previously set destination information.  
3
Sender (p.67)  
Enter the sender's information that appears in the recipient's e-mail program (sender name and e-mail address)  
when you send an image using Scan to E-mail.  
If user authentication is being used, enter the login name.  
4
Network Scanning (p.58)  
This lets you select transmission methods for the network scanner function, configure settings for Scan to  
E-mail, and program group indexes.  
5
Services (p.59)  
This lets you establish SMTP server settings, DNS server settings, and WINS server settings for Scan to E-mail  
and Scan to FTP (Hyperlink), and for entering a host name instead of an IP address when storing a transmission  
destination. Configure LDAP server settings if an LDAP server is used.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING  
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu frame, and then establish the required settings. These settings should only be  
established by the network administrator.  
For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.  
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu  
frame.  
Set a limit for the size of image files.  
1
4
A limit can be set for the size of image files sent  
by Scan to E-mail to prevent excessively large  
files from being sent.  
The Network Scanning  
Setup page appears.  
If the image file created from the scanned image  
is larger than the set limit, the image file is  
discarded. The limit can be set from 1 MB to 10  
MB in increments of 1 MB.  
The factory default setting is "Unlimited". If you wish to  
set a limit, remove the checkmark from the "Unlimited"  
checkbox and enter the desired limit in "Upper Limit".  
Select the transmission methods that  
you wish to use.  
Select the scanner delivery methods that you  
want to use. In the "Enable Scanner Delivery to:"  
field, click the checkbox next to each method that  
you want to use so that a checkmark appears in  
the checkbox.  
2
Select the method for assigning a file  
name to a scanned image.  
Select the method for assigning a file name to a  
scanned image. In "File Naming", click the items  
that you wish to use in the file name. "Destination  
Name" and "Date & Time" are initially selected.  
5
All transmission methods are initially selected  
(factory default settings).  
If you are going to send images to the same  
recipient more than once, we recommend that  
you also select "Session Page Counter" or  
"Unique Identifier" to prevent sending multiple  
files with the same name, which would result in  
each successive file overwriting the previous file.  
Note  
• If a file name is entered at the time of  
transmission, the file name entered here  
will be disregarded.  
Selecting an e-mail subject (only used  
for Scan to E-mail).  
6
7
The setting is used to enter the subject that  
appears in the recipient's e-mail program when  
you perform Scan to E-mail. (This setting is not  
necessary if you will not be using Scan to E-mail.)  
The subject can be up to 80 characters long. Only  
one subject can be entered. If nothing is entered,  
"Scanned image from <Device Name>" will appear.  
* The name that appears in <Device Name> is  
the name stored in "Name" in the screen that  
appears when you click "System Information" in  
the menu frame. If a name has not been stored,  
the product name will appear.  
Configure the Advanced Setup settings.  
3
Select advanced functions that can be used for  
Scan to E-mail.  
Select the checkboxes of the functions that you  
wish to use.  
If a subject is entered at the time of transmission,  
the subject entered here will be disregarded.  
Note  
• The "Enable User Authentication" checkbox  
can be selected to restrict use of the network  
scanner function to authorized users. (p.69)  
• To allow a sender to be selected when sending  
an image by Scan to E-mail, make sure that  
"Disable selection of sender from Sender List"  
is not selected. (p.82)  
Click "Submit".  
After entering the  
settings, be sure to click  
"Submit" to store them.  
• If you wish to Bcc a copy of a Scan to E-mail  
transmission to an e-mail address, select the  
"Bcc:" checkbox and enter the e-mail address.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
SMTP SERVER AND DNS SERVER SETTINGS  
SMTP is used to transmit e-mail that is sent using Scan to E-mail or Scan to FTP (Hyperlink). To use these  
transmission methods, your SMTP server settings must be configured.  
Configuring SMTP server settings  
Click "Services" in the menu frame.  
Enter the required information in  
"SMTP Setup".  
For detailed explanations of the procedures for  
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu  
frame.  
1
3
4
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
Click "SMTP".  
2
4
Configuring DNS server settings  
If you entered a host name in "Primary SMTP Server" or "Secondary SMTP Server" of "SMTP Setup", you must also  
configure your DNS server settings.  
You will also need to configure your DNS server settings if host names will be entered in "Hostname or IP Address"  
when storing destinations for Scan to FTP (Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)) or Scan to Desktop.  
Click "Services" in the menu frame.  
Enter the required information in  
"DNS Setup".  
1
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for  
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu  
frame.  
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
4
Click "DNS".  
2
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
CONFIGURING LDAP SERVER SETTINGS (WHEN  
USING AN LDAP SERVER)  
If mail addresses are managed on your network by an LDAP server, the e-mail addresses stored in the LDAP server  
can be used for Scan to E-mail.  
In addition, user authentication can be enabled to restrict use of the network scanner function by means of user  
passwords stored in the LDAP server. (p.69)  
To allow the machine to use the e-mail addresses in the LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be configured in the Web page.  
Click "LDAP" in the menu frame.  
1
Select "Enable" in the "LDAP Setup" menu.  
2
Click "Submit".  
3
Configure the settings in "Global  
Address Books List".  
4
For detailed explanations of the procedures for  
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.  
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
5
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
PROGRAMMING CUSTOM INDEX NAMES  
Stored destinations appear as one-touch keys in the Address book screen of the touch panel (p.71). Each stored  
destination appears in the ABC (alphabetical) index, and can also be included in one of the six custom indexes (note  
that these are called "group indexes" in the touch panel). To program names for the custom indexes, follow the steps  
below.  
To change a previously programmed custom index name, simply overwrite the old name.  
To switch between the ABC index and the custom indexes in the Address book screen, see page 71.  
Note  
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu  
frame.  
1
Click "Custom Index".  
2
4
Enter names for groups 1 to 6.  
3
Six group indexes are available, and a name up  
to six characters long can be assigned to each.  
The names "USER 1" to "USER 6" are initially  
entered. Change the names as needed.  
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
4
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
SETTING UP DESTINATION INFORMATION  
To store the name and address of a destination in a one-touch key, click "Destination" in the Web page menu frame.  
"Destination" can also be used to edit or clear stored destinations. (p.66)  
A total of 200 destinations can be stored, including E-mail, FTP, Desktop, and Group destinations.  
Stored destinations can be selected in the machine's touch panel when transmission is performed.  
* Multiple e-mail addresses (up to 100) can be stored as a group. Note that this may reduce the maximum number  
of destinations (normally 200) that can be stored.  
E-mail:  
FTP:  
Desktop:  
Group:  
See below  
Refer to page 63.  
Refer to page 64.  
Refer to page 65.  
Click here.  
Make sure that the address book screen (p.71) does not appear in the machine's touch panel when you store,  
edit, or delete destinations. Destinations cannot be edited or deleted when the address book screen appears.  
Note  
Storing destinations for Scan to E-mail  
Click "Destination" in the menu frame.  
Enter the destination information.  
1
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for  
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu  
frame.  
Click "E-mail".  
2
If user authentication is enabled and you wish  
Note  
to allow login using the above stored  
information, select the "It adds also to the  
Sender List." checkbox and enter the "Login  
Name" (maximum of 32 characters). The login  
name must be the same as the login name  
stored in the LDAP server.  
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
4
To perform Scan to E-mail, the SMTP server settings must first be established. Click "Application" in the Web  
page, click "SMTP" in the screen that appears, and then enter the settings under "SMTP Setup" (p.59).  
Note  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Storing destinations for Scan to FTP  
Click "Destination" in the menu frame.  
If you select the "Enable Hyperlink to FTP  
server to be e-mailed" checkbox and select  
a previously stored recipient (p.62) from  
"E-mail Destination", an e-mail will be sent  
to the recipient informing them of the file  
format and location of the scanned image  
data. A hyperlink to the file server to which  
the scanned image data was sent appears  
in the e-mail, and the recipient can click the  
hyperlink to go directly to the location where  
the image data is stored.  
1
Note  
Click "FTP".  
2
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
4
Enter the destination information.  
3
4
For detailed explanations of the procedures for  
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu  
frame.  
If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address", you will need to enter the DNS server or WINS server  
settings. Click "Application" in the menu frame and then click "DNS" or "WINS" in the page that appears to  
configure the corresponding settings.  
Note  
To perform Scan to FTP (Hyperlink), you must also click "SMTP" and then enter the settings under "SMTP  
Setup" for the SMTP server (p.59).  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Storing destinations for Scan to Desktop  
The destination for Scan to Desktop is stored by the Sharp Network Scanner Tool Setup Wizard when "Network  
Scanner Tool" is installed in your computer. For this reason, there is no need to store the Scan to Desktop  
destination in the Web page. (The Network Scanner Tool is on the CD-ROM that accompanied the Network Scanner  
Expansion Kit .)  
For information on Scan to Desktop system requirements, installing the Network Scanner Tool, and storing the  
destination, see the Users Guide for the Network Scanner Tool on the CD-ROM that accompanies the network  
scanner expansion kit.  
Normally your computer is stored as the destination by the method indicated above.  
The following page for storing Scan to Desktop destination information appears when "Destination" is selected in the  
menu frame, followed by "Desktop". This page is used by mainly by the system administrator in the following  
circumstance.  
• When another machine with the network scanner function has been added to the same network, and you wish to  
perform Scan to Desktop from the added machine to a destination programmed in the previously existing machine.  
Refer to "Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations" (p.66), and select the Scan to Desktop  
destination information that you wish to transfer to the new machine. Enter the displayed information in the same  
setting screen of the new machine. (When all information has been entered, click "Submit".)  
If there are additional destinations that you want to transfer to the new machine, repeat this procedure for each  
destination.  
Note that if there are any discrepancies between the newly programmed information and the information in the host  
computer, transmission and reception may not be possible.  
• For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu frame.  
Note  
• If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address", you will need to enter the DNS server or WINS server  
settings. Click "Application" in the menu frame and then click "DNS" or "WINS" in the page that appears to  
configure the corresponding settings.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Storing Groups (Scan to E-mail)  
If you are using Scan to E-mail, a scanned image can be sent to multiple destinations in a single operation.  
Up to 100 destinations can be stored in one group.  
Note  
Click "Destination" in the menu frame.  
1
Click "Group".  
2
4
Enter the destination information.  
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for  
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu  
frame.  
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
4
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations  
To edit or delete programmed destinations, click "Destination" in the menu frame of the Web page.  
Click "Destination" in the menu frame  
of the Web page.  
1
In the Destinations List, click the  
checkbox of the destination that you  
want to edit or delete.  
2
To edit the selected destination, click  
"Edit" under the Destinations List.  
3
The programming screen  
of the destination  
selected in step 2  
appears. Edit the  
information in the same  
way as you initially stored  
it.  
When finished, be sure to click "Submit" to save  
your changes.  
To delete the selected destination,  
click "Delete" under the Destinations  
List.  
4
A message appears  
asking you to confirm the  
deletion. Click "Yes" to  
delete.  
If you attempt to edit or delete a programmed destination in the following situations, a warning message will  
appear and editing/deletion will not be possible.  
Note  
• The destination that you wish to edit or delete is currently being used for transmission.  
• The destination is included in a group.  
If the destination is being used for a current transmission, cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and  
then edit or delete the destination. If the destination is included in a group, delete the destination from the group  
and then edit or delete the destination.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
STORING THE SENDER INFORMATION (Scan to E-mail)  
Use this procedure to store the sender information (sender name and e-mail address) that appears when you send  
an image by Scan to E-mail. Up to 200 senders can be stored (only one sender can be selected for a transmission).  
The sender name appears in the recipient's e-mail program.  
Click "Sender" in the menu frame.  
Enter the sender information.  
1
3
For detailed explanations of the procedures for  
establishing settings, click "Help" in the menu  
frame.  
Click "Add".  
2
The sender programming  
screen appears.  
If user authentication is enabled and you wish to  
allow login using the above stored information,  
enter the login name for that information in "Login  
Name" (maximum of 32 characters). The login  
name must be the same as the login name stored  
in the LDAP server.  
4
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entries will be stored.  
4
Editing and deleting programmed sender's information  
Click "Sender" in the menu frame.  
Click "Edit" or "Delete".  
1
2
If you clicked "Edit", edit  
the information in the  
same way that you  
initially programmed it  
and then click "Add" to  
save your changes. If  
you clicked "Delete", a  
message will appear  
asking you to confirm the  
deletion. Click "Yes" to  
delete.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE  
WEB PAGE ("Passwords")  
Passwords can be established to protect the settings and information stored in the Web page. Note that it is not  
necessary to set passwords; the network scanner functionality can also be used without passwords.  
A password can be set for the administrator and a password can be set for users. When the Web page is accessed  
with the user password, the "Device Setup" and "Network Setup" settings cannot be configured.  
Click "Passwords" in the menu frame.  
When you have completed all of the  
entries, click "Submit".  
The entered password is stored.  
1
5
After setting the password, turn the machine  
power off and then back on.  
When a password is set, you will be prompted for the  
password when you attempt to access a Web page  
with protected settings. For the "User name", enter  
"user" if you are accessing the page as a user, or  
"admin" if you are accessing the page as an  
administrator. For detailed information on setting  
passwords, refer to "Help".  
Select the "Enable Password  
Protection of this Web Site"  
checkbox.  
2
Enter the current password in "Admin  
Password".  
3
4
When establishing a password for the first time,  
enter "Sharp" in "Admin Password".  
Be sure to enter "S" in upper case and  
"harp" in lower case (passwords are case  
Caution  
sensitive).  
Enter passwords in "User Password"  
and "Admin Password".  
A maximum of 7 characters and/or numbers can  
be entered for each password (passwords are  
case sensitive).  
Be sure to enter the same password in "New  
Password" as you did in "Confirm Password".  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
RESTRICTING USE OF THE NETWORK SCANNER  
FUNCTION (USER AUTHENTICATION)  
Use of the network scanner function can be restricted by means of user passwords stored in an LDAP server.  
Settings required for user authentication  
To implement user authentication, the following settings are required:  
• Enable user authentication (step 3 on page 58)  
• Configure LDAP server settings (p.60)  
• Store login names (p.67)  
Logging in when user authentication is enabled  
To use the network scanner function when user authentication is enabled, you must first log in. Follow these steps:  
Press the [SCAN] key on the operation panel.  
The login screen will appear in the touch panel.  
1
COPY  
ON LINE  
PRINT  
DATA  
DATA  
SCAN  
FAX  
LINE  
DATA  
JOB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
If you will use the [SELECT FROM SENDER LIST] key, go to step 3.  
Touch the [LOGIN NAME] key,  
[E-MAIL ADDRESS] key.  
Touch the [SELECT FROM SENDER  
2
3
4
LIST] key.  
A text entry screen will  
The sender list screen  
appears. When you  
appear when each key is  
touched. Enter the  
LOGIN NAME, SENDER  
NAME, and E-MAIL  
ADDRESS. (Go to step  
4.)  
OK  
USER AUTHENTICATION  
LOGIN NAME  
select your login name,  
sender name and e-mail  
address are entered.  
SENDER NAME  
:
SELECT FROM  
SENDER LIST  
E-MAIL ADDRESS  
PASSWORD  
Enter the password.  
4
5
For the password, enter the user password that is stored in the server.  
PASSWORD  
CANCEL  
OK  
abc  
ABC  
AB/ab 12#$%  
SPACE  
Touch the [OK] key.  
If the login name and password are valid, the initial screen (p.70) of scanner mode appears.  
To logout, press the [LOGOUT] key( ). If audit mode is enabled, you will also log out of your account.  
To switch to a mode other than network scanner mode, you must log out.  
Note  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INITIAL SCREEN OF SCANNER MODE  
The condition setting screen of scanner mode is displayed by pressing the [SCAN] key (refer to the operation  
manual for copier) while the copy mode, print mode, fax mode, or job status screen appears in the touch panel.  
If user authentication is enabled, the initial screen will appear after authentication. (p.69)  
In the explanations that follow, it is assumed that the initial screen that appears after pressing the [SCAN] key is the  
condition setting screen (shown below). If you have set the display to show the address book screen (following  
page) when the [SCAN] key is pressed, touch the [CONDITION SETTINGS] key in the address book screen to  
display the condition setting screen.  
• The administrator setting "DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS" can be used to set the display to show either the  
condition setting screen (shown below) or the address book screen (following page) when the [SCAN] key is  
pressed (refer to "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)").  
Note  
• For information on the parts of the machine and the operation panel that are used for network scanning, refer  
to the operation manual for copier.  
Condition settings screen  
The display is initially set (factory setting) to show the following condition setting screen as the initial screen.  
1
READY TO SEND.  
AUTO  
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
10  
9
QUALITY  
2
300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
SEND SETTINGS  
3
4
5
TIFF-G4  
8
FILE FORMAT  
AUTO  
7
ORIGINAL  
6
1
2
7
Message display  
Messages appear here to indicate the current  
status of the machine.  
Two-sided original and job build icon display  
(p.76, 77)  
Either icon appears when two-sided scanning or  
job build scanning (when an RSPF is installed) is  
selected after pressing the [ORIGINAL] key. The  
icon can be touched to open a function selection  
screen.  
[ADDRESS BOOK] key (p.71)  
This displays the address book screen (next page).  
Touch this key when you wish to use a one-touch key  
that has a destination (or group) programmed in it.  
8
9
[ORIGINAL] key (p.76, 77, 78)  
3
[ADDRESS REVIEW] key (p.74)  
Touch this key to set the original size manually,  
select two-sided scanning, or select job build  
(when an RSPF is installed).  
When performing Scan to E-mail broadcast  
transmission, touch this key to check your selected  
destinations. A list of the destinations will appear,  
and you can delete any incorrect destinations.  
[FILE FORMAT] key (p.81)  
Touch this key to change the format of the image  
file to be sent, or change the number of pages per  
file. The selected format is highlighted at the top of  
the key.  
4
5
[ADDRESS ENTRY] key (p.74)  
When performing Scan to E-mail, touch this key if  
you wish to enter the e-mail address of the recipient  
manually instead of using a one-touch key.  
10  
11  
[RESOLUTION] key (p.80)  
[SEND SETTINGS] key (p.82)  
Touch this key to change the subject*, file name, or  
sender* when sending a scanned image.  
Touch this key to change the resolution setting for  
the original to be scanned. The selected resolution  
setting will be highlighted above the key.  
* When using Scan to E-mail.  
[QUALITY] key (p.79)  
6
[INFORMATION] icon (p.79)  
Touch this key to change the image quality and  
density settings for scanning. The selected image  
quality and density are highlighted at the top of the  
key.  
The [INFORMATION] icon appears in the base  
screen when one or more special modes are  
selected.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Address book screen  
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key in the condition setting screen (previous page) to display the screen shown below  
at right.  
6
Destinations stored using the Web page are grouped in indexes ( ) according to the letter entered in "Initial" for  
1
each destination, and the name entered in "Display Name" is displayed in the one-touch key ( ).  
1
2
3
4
READY TO SEND.  
CONDITION  
SETTINGS  
TEST1  
TEST2  
TEST4  
TEST6  
TEST8  
1/2  
TEST3  
TEST5  
TEST7  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
6
1
GLOBAL  
ADDRESS SEARCH  
6
FREQUENT USE  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRST UVWXYZ  
ABC  
GROUP  
6
5
E-mail Destination Management page  
USER 1  
USER 2  
USER 3  
USER 4  
USER 5  
USER 6  
ABC  
GROUP  
1
5
One-touch key display  
[ABC  
GROUP] key  
This shows the one-touch keys that have been  
stored on the selected "index card". The key type is  
indicated by the icon at the right.  
Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical  
index and the group index. The selected index type  
is displayed.  
4
:Scan to E-mail  
:Scan to FTP  
:Scan to Desktop  
6
Index keys  
One-touch key destinations are stored on each of  
these index cards (alphabetical index or group  
index). Touch an index key to display the card.  
Group indexes make it possible to store one-touch  
keys by group with an assigned name for easy  
reference. This is done with the system settings  
(p.61). Frequently used one-touch key destinations  
can be stored on the [FREQUENT USE] card for  
convenient access.  
The number of one-touch keys that appear in one  
screen can be changed to 6, 8, or 12 using "THE  
NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS / SENDER  
KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING" in the administrator  
settings.  
2
Display switching keys  
In cases where the one-touch keys cannot all be  
displayed on one screen, this shows how many  
screens are left. Touch the "  
move through the screens.  
" "  
" keys to  
3
4
[CONDITION SETTINGS] key  
This displays the condition setting screen (p.70),  
which is used to set various conditions.  
[GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH] key (p.75)  
If an LDAP server is used, touch this key to select  
a Scan to E-mail destination in the LDAP server. If  
an LDAP server is not used, the key is grayed out  
and cannot be selected.  
• If the initial screen has been set to the address book screen in the administrator settings, the above screen will  
be the initial screen.  
Note  
• If desired, you can use the administrator settings, "DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS", to set the default screen  
to the group index. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SENDING AN IMAGE  
BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD  
Make sure the machine is in scanner  
mode.  
Adjust the quality setting. (p.79)  
1
4
The factory default  
settings are:  
COPY  
When the [SCAN] key  
light is on, the machine is  
in scanner mode. If the  
light is not on, press the  
[SCAN] key.  
If user authentication is  
enabled, you must log in.  
(p.69)  
AUTO  
QUALITY  
ON LINE  
DATA  
PRINT  
SCAN  
FAX  
• Image quality:  
TEXT/PHOTO  
• Density: AUTO  
30
RESOLON  
DATA  
TIFF-G4  
LINE  
DATA  
FILE FORMAT  
JOB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
AUTO  
8
½X11  
Adjust the resolution setting. (p.80)  
Load the original.  
5
2
QUALITY  
The factory default  
setting is "300dpi".  
For detailed information  
on loading an original,  
refer to the operation  
manual for copier.  
300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
AUTO  
8½X11  
ORIGINAL  
You cannot load documents in both the  
RSPF and on the document glass and send  
them in a single transmission. If documents  
are loaded in both the RSPF and on the  
document glass, only the document in the  
RSPF will be scanned and transmitted.  
Note  
Select the file format. (p.81)  
6
QUALITY  
The factory default  
settings are:  
• FILE TYPE: TIFF  
300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
COMPRESSION MODE:  
MMR (G4)  
Check the original size that appears in  
the top half of the [ORIGINAL] key.  
3
AUTO  
X11  
PAGES PER FILE: ALL  
ORIGINAL  
300dpi  
The original size is  
automatically detected.  
RESOLUTION  
If you loaded a  
non-standard size  
document or wish to  
change the scanning size,  
touch the [ORIGINAL] key  
and set the document  
size. (Refer to page 78.)  
TIFF-G4  
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key.  
7
FILE FORMAT  
The address book screen  
appears.  
AUTO  
8½X11  
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
ORIGINAL  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
SEND SETTINGS  
To scan a two-sided original (when an RSPF  
is installed), refer to page 76.  
If you are scanning a large number of  
originals (and the RSPF is installed), follow  
the procedure on page 77.  
Note  
To rotate the document image 90° before  
transmission, see page 78.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Using the RSPF  
Touch the one-touch key of the desired  
destination.  
8
Press the [START] key ( ).  
10  
The key you touched is  
READY TO SEND.  
highlighted. If you touch  
the wrong key, touch the  
key again to cancel the  
selection. The key  
display will return to  
normal.  
Scanning begins. When  
TEST1  
TEST2  
TEST4  
TEST6  
TEST8  
EFGHI  
scanning is finished,  
"SENDING. PRESS [C]  
TO CANCEL." appears in  
the touch panel and  
transmission begins.  
When transmission is  
finished, "SENDING  
COMPLETED." appears  
in the touch panel.  
TEST3  
TEST5  
TEST7  
FREQUENT USE  
ABCD  
JKLMN  
OP  
• Refer to pages 62 to 65 for information on  
programming one-touch key destinations.  
• When touching a one-touch key,  
corresponding information from the e-mail  
destination screen is shown in the  
Note  
Using the document glass  
message display.  
Press the [START] key ( ).  
10  
• The destination e-mail address for Scan to  
E-mail can be entered manually, or you  
can search for a destination in an LDAP  
server on the network (p.74 to 75).  
• Multiple destinations can be specified for  
a Scan to E-mail transmission (p.74).  
The original is scanned  
and the [READ-END] key  
appears.  
Enter a file name for the scanned  
image. (p.82)  
9
4
If the send settings are  
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
not changed, a file name  
If you have another page to scan,  
change pages and then press the  
[START] key ( ).  
Repeat this sequence until all pages have been  
scanned.  
11  
12  
is assigned based on the  
items specified in the  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
Web page.  
SEND SETTINGS  
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning  
automatically ends and transmission begins.  
Note  
When sending an image by Scan to E-mail,  
a subject and sender's name can be  
entered.  
Note  
Normally the subject and sender are  
automatically entered based on the  
information stored in "Reply E-mail Address"  
in "SMTP Setup" in the Web page.  
If user authentication is enabled, the e-mail  
address of the user who logged in is used as  
the sender.  
After the final page is scanned, touch  
the [READ-END] key.  
"SENDING. PRESS [C]  
ESS [START].  
EAD-END].  
TO CANCEL." appears in  
the touch panel and  
transmission begins.  
When transmission is  
finished, "SENDING  
COMPLETED." appears  
in the touch panel.  
READ-END  
To cancel transmission while "SCANNING ORIGINAL." appears in the display or before the [READ-END] key  
is touched, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) or the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ). If you press the [CLEAR] key ( ), the  
destination and scan settings are saved. To cancel a transmission, press the [JOB STATUS] key and cancel  
the job. (p.83)  
Note  
• If you exceed the number of pages that can be scanned while scanning an original, "THE MEMORY  
BECOMES FULL." will appear in the touch panel. To send the data that has been scanned to that point, touch  
the [SEND] key. To cancel the transmission, touch the [CANCEL] key.  
• If a misfeed occurs while an original is being scanned, remove the original according to the instructions in the  
touch panel. To resume scanning after removing the misfeed, press the [START] key ( ).  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
TRANSMISSION METHODS FOR SCAN TO E-MAIL  
The destination for a Scan to E-mail transmission can be selected from the address book or entered manually. You  
can also use an e-mail address stored on an LDAP server.  
It is possible to select multiple destinations for a Scan to E-mail transmission using a combination of these methods.  
Use the following procedure when you wish to enter the e-mail address manually or use an e-mail address stored on  
an LDAP server.  
Sending an image by entering an e-mail address manually  
Perform steps 1 through 6 of "BASIC  
TRANSMISSION METHOD". (p.72)  
If you wish to enter another e-mail  
address, repeat steps 2 through 4.  
1
2
5
If you wish to select an e-mail address from the  
address book screen, follow steps 7 and 8 of  
"BASIC TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.72 to 73).  
If you wish to select an e-mail address in an  
LDAP server, follow the steps in "Sending an  
image by selecting an e-mail address in an LDAP  
server" (p.75).  
Touch the [ADDRESS ENTRY] key.  
The e-mail address entry  
screen appears.  
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
SEND SETTINGS  
If you frequently transmit to a fixed group of  
destinations, you can store the destinations  
as a group (p.65).  
Note  
Touch the [ADDRESS REVIEW] key  
and check the destinations.  
6
Touch the keys on the keyboard to  
enter the e-mail address.  
3
When the [ADDRESS  
ADDRESS  
E-MAIL ADDRESS  
CANCEL  
OK  
REVIEW] key is touched,  
BOOK  
only the entered  
destinations are displayed.  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
To delete a destination,  
abc  
ABC  
touch the key of the  
SEND SETTINGS  
destination that you wish  
to delete.  
Touch the [OK] key to  
return to the initial screen.  
SPACE  
AB/ab  
12#$%  
• If you make a mistake, touch the  
cursor ( ) back to the mistake and then enter the  
key to move the  
correct character.  
The entered or selected destinations appear in  
• To enter a number, touch the [AB/ab  
12#$%] key.  
Note  
the address review screen as one touch keys.  
A maximum of 18 characters of the name or  
e-mail address can appear in each key.  
The screen will change to the number entry screen.  
To return to the text entry screen, touch the [AB/ab  
12#$%] key again.  
Continue from step 9 of "BASIC  
TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.73).  
Touch the [OK] key.  
7
4
CANCEL  
OK  
To cancel the operation when selecting  
destinations, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
Note  
abc  
ABC  
Important points when using Scan to E-mail  
Caution  
Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large. Your mail server's system administrator may  
have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail transmission. If this limit is  
exceeded, the e-mail will not be delivered to the recipient. Even if there is no limit and your e-mail is  
successfully delivered, a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden on the  
recipient's network, depending on the recipient's network (Internet) connection environment. If large image  
data files are repeatedly sent, the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other,  
unrelated data transmissions and in some cases, may even cause the mail server or network to go down. In  
cases where you need to send multiple documents, try such measures as lowering the resolution mode.  
A limit can be set for the size of image files sent by Scan to E-mail in "Maximum Size of File" (p.58) in the Web page.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Sending an image by selecting an e-mail address in an LDAP server  
To use an LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be configured in the Web page.  
Perform steps 1 through 6 of "BASIC  
Touch the [OK] key.  
1
2
5
TRANSMISSION METHOD". (p.72  
)
The server begins searching.  
When the search is finished, a list of the matching  
e-mail addresses appears.  
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key.  
If there are no matches, touch the [OK] key  
in the message screen that appears. Touch  
The address book screen  
appears.  
Note  
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
the [SEARCH AGAIN] key and repeat the  
procedure from step 4.  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
SEND SETTINGS  
Touch the one-touch key of the  
desired destination.  
6
If you touch the wrong  
READY TO SEND.  
key, touch the correct key.  
Touch the [GLOBAL ADDRESS  
SEARCH] key.  
3
ADD SELECTED  
tes  
test1  
test3  
test5  
test2  
test4  
test6  
The global address  
search screen appears.  
CONDITION  
1/2  
SETTINGS  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
GLOBAL  
ADDRESS SEARCH  
Touch the [ADD SELECTED] key.  
7
JKLMN  
OPQRST UVWXYZ  
ABC  
GROUP  
4
The destination selected  
No.001:test1  
in step 6 is entered as a  
destination of the  
transmission.  
If multiple LDAP servers have been  
ADD SELECTED  
Note  
configured, the server select screen appears.  
Touch the key of the server that you wish to  
search and then touch the [OK] key.  
tes  
test1  
test3  
test5  
test2  
test4  
test6  
SERVER SELECT  
SERVER 1  
CANCEL  
OK  
1/2  
SERVER 2  
SERVER 3  
SERVER 4  
If you wish to enter another e-mail  
address, repeat steps 6 through 7.  
8
If multiple LDAP servers have been configured and  
you wish to select a different server, touch the  
[ADDRESS BOOK] key and then touch the  
[GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH] key.  
The selected server key is highlighted.  
Touch the key of the server that you  
wish to search and then touch the  
[OK] key.  
4
Touch the [ADDRESS REVIEW] key  
and check the destinations.  
When the [ADDRESS  
9
GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH  
CANCEL  
OK  
test  
REVIEW] key is touched,  
only the entered  
CONDITION  
SETTINGS  
destinations are displayed.  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
To delete a destination,  
touch the key of the  
abc  
ABC  
SEARCH AGAIN  
12#$%  
SPACE  
AB/ab  
destination that you wish  
ADDRESS BOOK  
to delete.  
Touch the [OK] key to  
return to the initial screen.  
• If you make a mistake, touch the  
cursor ( ) back to the mistake and then enter the  
correct character.  
key to move the  
• To enter a number, touch the [AB/ab  
12#$%] key.  
Continue from step 9 of "BASIC  
TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.73).  
10  
The screen will change to the number entry screen.  
To return to the text entry screen, touch the [AB/ab  
12#$%] key again.  
To cancel the operation when selecting  
Note  
destinations, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
SCANNING AND TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED  
ORIGINAL (when an RSPF is installed)  
Follow these steps to automatically scan a two-sided original.  
Make sure the machine is in scanner  
mode and then load the document in  
the RSPF. (p.72)  
Touch the [OK] key.  
1
4
You will return to the  
initial screen.  
INAL SIZE  
MANUAL  
OK  
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
2
2-SIDED  
TABLET  
JOB  
BUILD  
300dpi  
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES  
RESOLUTION  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
AUTO  
8½X11  
Continue from step 4 of "BASIC  
TRANSMISSION METHOD" (p.72 to 73).  
5
ORIGINAL  
Touch the [2-SIDED BOOKLET] key or  
the [2-SIDED TABLET] key as  
appropriate for the original you  
loaded.  
3
If you wish to rotate the  
ORIGINAL SIZE  
original 90° when  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
creating an image file,  
touch the [ROTATE THE  
IMAGE 90 DEGREES]  
checkbox (a checkmark  
should appear in the  
box).  
2-SIDED  
BOOKLET  
2-SIDED  
TABLET  
ROTATE THE  
If the correct original size does not appear in  
the screen of step 2, touch the [MANUAL]  
key and specify the correct original size  
(p.78).  
Note  
Note  
• Booklets and tablets  
Two-sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets, and two-sided  
originals that are bound at the top are tablets.  
Booklet  
Tablet  
Two-sided scanning mode turns off after transmission is finished. Two-sided  
scanning mode can also be canceled by pressing the [CLEAR ALL] key  
(
).  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (when  
an RSPF is installed)  
If you have a large number of originals, the originals can be scanned in batches using the RSPF.  
Make sure the machine is in scanner  
mode and then load the document in  
the RSPF. (p.72)  
Perform steps 4 through 9 of "BASIC  
TRANSMISSION METHOD". (p.72 to 73  
1
5
6
)
Press the [START] key ( ).  
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
2
Scanning of the originals  
begins. A message  
appears in the touch  
panel.  
300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
AUTO  
8½X11  
ORIGINAL  
When all of the originals in the RSPF  
have been scanned, load the next  
batch and press the [START] key ( ).  
Repeat this sequence until all pages have been  
scanned.  
7
8
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key.  
3
If you wish to rotate the  
original 90° when creating  
an image file, touch the  
[ROTATE THE IMAGE 90  
DEGREES] checkbox (a  
checkmark should appear  
in the box).  
RIGINAL SIZE  
MANUAL  
OK  
4
2-SIDED  
TABLET  
JOB  
BUILD  
If no action is taken for one minute, scanning  
automatically ends and transmission begins.  
Note  
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 EES  
When all originals have been  
scanned, touch the [READ-END] key.  
"SENDING. PRESS [C]  
If the correct original size does not appear in  
the screen of step 2, touch the [MANUAL] key  
and specify the correct original size (p.78).  
Note  
ESS [START].  
EAD-END].  
TO CANCEL." appears in  
the touch panel and  
transmission begins.  
When transmission is  
finished, "SENDING  
COMPLETED." appears  
in the touch panel.  
Touch the [OK] key.  
4
READ-END  
You will return to the  
initial screen.  
NAL SIZE  
OK  
MANUAL  
JOB  
BUILD  
2-SIDED  
TABLET  
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES  
• Job build mode turns off after transmission is finished. Job build mode can also be canceled by pressing the  
[CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
Note  
• When performing Scan to E-mail, see the notes on page 74.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCANNING SETTINGS  
(ORIGINAL SIZE, QUALITY, RESOLUTION,  
FILE FORMAT, AND SEND SETTING)  
When sending an image, you can change the original scan size, quality, resolution, file format, and file name.  
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE  
If you load an original that is not a standard size, or if you wish to change the scanning size, touch the [ORIGINAL]  
key and set the original size manually.  
Perform the following steps after loading the document in the RSPF or on the document glass.  
*Standard sizes:  
The following originals sizes will be correctly detected:  
Note  
• Countries/regions that use inch-based standard sizes:11"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R,  
5-1/2"x8-1/2", 5-1/2"x8-1/2"R*.  
• Countries/regions that use AB standard sizes: A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R*, B4, B5, B5R.  
* These sizes can only be automatically detected when the RSPF is used.  
If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed, or  
the original size may not appear.  
If you wish to select an AB size, touch  
the [AB INCH] key and then touch  
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
1
the desired original size key.  
300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
[AB] is highlighted and  
AB size keys are  
ORIGINAL SIZE  
MANUAL  
OK  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
AUTO  
displayed. To return to  
the inch size, touch the  
[AB INCH] key once  
again.  
OK  
A5  
A5R  
A4  
B5  
AUTO  
8½X11  
B5R  
B4  
A4R  
AB  
ORIGINAL  
INCH  
Touch the outer [OK] key.  
4
Touch the [MANUAL] key.  
2
You will return to the  
initial screen.  
Touching the inner [OK]  
key in the step above  
returns you to step 2.  
The sizes that can be  
selected are displayed.  
ORIGINAL SIZE  
MANUAL  
INAL SIZE  
MANUAL  
OK  
OK  
O
A4  
5R  
B5  
JOB  
BUIL  
DED  
LET  
2-S
TABLET  
4
3
A4R  
AB  
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 D  
INCH  
If you wish to rotate the original 90° when  
Note  
creating an image file, touch the [ROTATE  
THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES] checkbox (a  
checkmark should appear in the box).  
The selected size appears in the top  
5
half of the [ORIGINAL] key.  
300dpi  
• The [2-SIDED] key and [JOB BUILD] key  
do not appear on models that do not have  
an RSPF installed.  
RESOLUTION  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
Touch the desired original size key.  
A4  
3
ORIGINAL  
[AUTO] is no longer  
highlighted. [MANUAL]  
ORIGINAL SIZE  
MANUAL  
OK  
OK  
and the original size key  
you touched are  
highlighted.  
AUTO  
You can return to automatic detection by  
pressing the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).  
Note  
1
1
/
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
52X82  
52X82R  
82X11  
1
1
1
/
/
/
82X11R  
82X13  
84  
AB  
11X17  
INCH  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
SELECTING THE QUALITY  
You can adjust the quality manually to match the type of original. After loading the original in scanner mode, follow  
the steps below. The factory default settings are "TEXT/PHOTO" for the image quality, and "AUTO" for the density.  
Touch the [QUALITY] key.  
Touch the [OK] key.  
1
5
You will return to the  
initial screen.  
AUTO  
QUALITY  
OK  
30
AUTO  
MANUAL  
RESOLION  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
·
1
3
5
AUTO  
8
½X11  
Selecting the original type.  
2
Touch the appropriate  
ORIGINAL  
IMAGE TYPE  
key for the type of  
original to be scanned.  
The image will be  
processed according to  
the selected type.  
You can select the  
original type from  
TEXT  
TEXT/PHOTO  
PHOTO  
1
4
"TEXT", "TEXT/PHOTO"  
or "PHOTO".  
TEXT ( ) : Text original  
TEXT/PHOTO ( ) : Original with mixed text and photos.  
PHOTO ( ) : Photograph or illustration  
Touch the [AUTO MANUAL] key.  
3
OK  
"MANUAL" is highlighted.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
1
3
5
Adjust the density.  
4
OK  
Touch the  
or  
key  
to adjust the scanning  
density. (Touch the  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
key for a darker image or  
the  
key for a lighter  
1
3
5
image.)  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
SELECTING THE RESOLUTION  
The resolution for scanning an original can be selected. Load the original in scanner mode and then follow the steps  
below. The factory default setting for the resolution is "300 dpi".  
Change the resolution  
Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.  
1
QUALITY  
300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
AUTO  
8½X11  
ORIGINAL  
Touch the desired resolution key.  
2
Touch the resolution key  
that is most suitable for  
200dpi  
the original.  
300dpi  
The selected key will be  
highlighted.  
600dpi  
Touch the [OK] key.  
3
You will return to the  
initial screen.  
OK  
200dpi  
300dpi  
600dpi  
• The resolution is initially set to 300 dpi (factory default setting). A resolution of 200 dpi or 300 dpi produces  
sufficiently clear image data for normal text originals. (200 dpi is equivalent to the "Fine" character mode used  
for facsimiles).  
Note  
The 600 dpi setting should only be used in cases where high-clarity image reproduction is required, such as a  
photograph or an illustration. Note that a high resolution setting will result in a larger file size, and transmission  
may not be successful if there is insufficient disk capacity in the server to which the image is sent (or if the  
administrator of the server has restricted the file size). If transmission is not successful, you can try such  
measures as reducing the number of scanned pages in the file or reducing the scan size setting for the original  
("MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE" (p.78)).  
• The default resolution setting can be changed in the administrator settings. (See "INITIAL RESOLUTION  
SETTING" in "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
• The resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
SELECTING THE FILE FORMAT  
You can select the format of the image file that will be created (file type, compression mode, and pages per file). The  
factory default settings are "TIFF" for the file type, "MMR (G4)" for the compression mode, and "ALL" for the pages  
per file.  
Touch the [FILE FORMAT] key.  
• The factory default setting can be  
1
Note  
changed in the administrator settings.  
(See "INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING"  
in "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
QUALITY  
300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
To open the scanned image without using  
the software program in the CD-ROM that  
accompanies the network scanner  
expansion kit, the recipient must have a  
viewer program that can open the image  
format (file type) that was selected as  
explained above.  
TIFF-G4  
FILE FORMAT  
AUTO  
X11  
ORIGAL  
• The factory default setting for the image  
format produces the smallest file (TIFF  
G4). If the recipient cannot open the  
image, try sending the image in a different  
format.  
• If the number of scanned originals is not  
divisible by the number set in "PAGES  
PER FILE", the last file will have less  
pages.  
Select the file type and the  
compression mode.  
Either [TIFF] or [PDF] can be selected for the file  
type of the image data to be created, and  
[NONE], [MH (G3)] or [MMR (G4)] can be  
selected for the compression format.  
2
Set the number of pages per file.  
3
4
FILE TYPE  
PDF  
OK  
QUALITY  
300dpi  
TIFF  
MH (G3)  
2
COMPRESSION MODE  
NONE  
RESOLUTION  
MMR (G4)  
4
FILE FORMAT  
PAGES PER FILE  
AUTO  
8½X11  
ALL  
1
3
5
6
ORIGINAL  
Touch the "ALL" key or one of keys [1] to [6].  
• [ALL]: The scanned images are combined into a  
single file.  
• [1] to [6]: Multiple image files are created, each with  
the selected number of pages per file.  
Touch the [OK] key.  
4
You will return to the  
initial screen.  
OK  
MMR (G4)  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
CHANGING THE SEND SETTINGS  
The file name of the scanned image can be changed.  
When performing Scan to E-mail, the subject and sender can also be changed.  
If the send settings are not changed, these items are entered automatically using the information stored in the Web page.  
Touch the [SEND SETTINGS] key.  
If [SENDER] is touched, a sender  
selection screen will appear. Touch  
the desired one-touch key and then  
touch the [OK] key.  
The [GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH] key is used  
to select a user stored in a global address book  
as a sender. (p.75)  
1
4
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
SEND SETTINGS  
The [ADDRESS ENTRY] key is used to directly  
enter an e-mail address.  
Touch the [SUBJECT], [FILE NAME],  
or [SENDER] key to change the  
corresponding entry.  
2
OK  
1/2  
TEST1  
TEST2  
TEST3  
TEST5  
TEST4  
TEST6  
GL
ADDRESS SEARCH  
If the [Enable User  
SEND SETTINGS  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
Authentication] or  
[Disable selection of  
(USE DEF  
SUBJECT  
FREQUENT USE  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRST UVWXYZ  
ABC  
GROUP  
sender from Sender List]  
checkbox is selected in  
"Advanced Setup" in  
"Network Scanning" in the  
Web page, the [SENDER]  
key will be grayed out and  
cannot be selected (p.58).  
(USE DEF  
(USE DEF  
FILE E  
SENDER  
• The senders that have been stored in  
"Sender" in the Web page appear in the  
sender select screen. If the desired  
sender does not appear, you must first  
store it as a Scan to E-mail destination in  
"Sender" in the Web page. (p.67)  
Note  
• When a checkmark appears in the  
[Disable selection of sender.] checkbox in  
the Web page, the [SENDER] key in the  
"SEND SETTING" screen is grayed out to  
prevent selection of senders and entry of  
e-mail addresses.  
• If an LDAP server is not configured in the  
Web page, the [GLOBAL ADDRESS  
SEARCH] key will be grayed out and  
searching will not be possible.  
If the [SUBJECT] key or [FILE NAME]  
key is touched, a keyboard will  
appear. Enter the desired text and  
then touch the [OK] key.  
3
Up to 64 characters can be entered.  
SUBJECT  
CANCEL  
OK  
XXXX
abc  
ABC  
Touch the [OK] key in the send  
settings screen.  
5
12#$%  
SPACE  
AB/ab  
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ  
You will return to the  
initial screen.  
OK  
• A maximum of only 54 characters can be  
displayed in the send settings screen.  
• When entering a file name, there is no  
need to enter a file extension.  
Note  
The file extension is added automatically  
based on the selected file format.  
• The following symbols cannot be used  
when entering a file name or folder name.  
\
?
>
/
!
"
*
;
|
:
,
<
&
#
Depending on the environment of use of  
the OS, it may not be possible to use  
spaces and the symbols indicated below.  
For example, hyperlinks will not operate  
correctly or nonsense characters may appear.  
$ % ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ ` { } _  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CANCELING AN E-MAIL/FTP  
TRANSMISSION  
You can cancel a transmission job that is in progress. Cancellation is done from the scanner job status screen.  
You can cancel a transmission after scanning is finished by pressing the [CLEAR] key ( ) or the [CLEAR ALL]  
key ( ) while "SENDING. PRESS [C] TO CANCEL." appears in the touch key.  
Note  
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.  
1
DATA  
SCAN  
FAX  
LINE  
DATA  
JOB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTING  
Touch the [SCAN TO] key.  
2
4
SCAN TO  
Touch the job key of the transmission  
job that you wish to cancel.  
The touched key is highlighted.  
3
4
Touch the [STOP/DELETE] key.  
A message appears to  
confirm the cancellation.  
Touch the [YES] key to  
delete the selected job  
STOP/DELETE  
key and cancel the  
transmission.  
If you do not wish to cancel the  
transmission, touch the [NO] key.  
Note  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
METADATA DELIVERY (DATA  
ENTRY)  
When the application integration module is installed and an image file is generated for a scan send transmission,  
metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) can be generated based on  
pre-stored information and transmitted as a separate file. The metadata file is created in XML format. By linking the  
metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption  
server, a sophisticated document solution environment can be built.  
Scan to  
Desktop  
Metadata  
(XML file)  
Client PC that uses Network  
Scanner Tool  
Fax server, document  
management software,  
Server  
workflow application,  
encryption server, etc.  
Image file  
Scan to E-mail  
Scan to FTP  
Using the application integration module, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel  
and transmitted along with the image as an XML file.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA  
TRANSMISSION  
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES  
All settings related to metadata are configured in the Web pages. (Administrator rights are required.)  
To configure metadata settings, click [Metadata Settings] in the Web page menu frame.  
Storing Metadata Sets  
Store the items (the metadata set) that are written to the XML file that is generated during scanning. Up to 10  
metadata items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of  
transmission.  
Addresses specified in "Require destination selection and include in metadata" when a metadata set is stored  
Note  
can be selected as transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry,  
and/or a global address book search. (Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as  
transmission destinations.)  
METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP  
When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name  
on the computer. When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party  
software application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by  
means of the file name generated by the computer. (When setting the file name in [SEND SETTINGS], to ensure  
that a previously existing file on a computer is not overwritten by a transmitted file of the same name, be sure to  
configure the file name so that name duplication cannot occur; for example, by including a unique extension (the  
date, etc.) in the generated file name. If the file name setting is left blank, the machine will automatically generate a  
file name that is unique.)  
4
• It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata. For more information, see the  
Note  
Network Scanner Tool User's Guide (PDF format) on the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM.  
• For information on the license agreement and how to use the CD-ROM that accompanies the application  
integration module, see the separate "Sharpdesk license kit" manual.  
Using third party software applications  
Various types of third party software applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from  
Network Scanner Tool and some cannot. When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network  
Scanner Tool will start the application with the ".exe" command using the file name as a parameter. Normally  
an application is started twice, once for the image file and once for the XML file. For example, when Network  
Scanner Tool is set to start the application "APP.EXE", the following commands are applied when the two files  
"IMG.TIF" and "IMG.XML" are received.  
APP.EXE IMG.TIF  
APP.EXE IMG.XML  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRANSMITTING METADATA  
Follow the steps below to select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata transmission.  
Touch the [DATA ENTRY] key.  
Touch the key of the value that you  
wish to enter.  
1
5
CANCEL  
6
OK  
ADDRES  
ADDRES  
3
DIRECT ENTRY  
1/9  
Value2  
Value4  
Value6  
SEND S  
DATA ENTRY  
If no metadata sets have been stored, the  
[DATA ENTRY] key cannot be selected.  
Store a metadata set in the Web pages and  
then perform the transmission procedure.  
• If the entry values of the metadata item were stored  
in selection format, the selections will appear as  
keys. If a value is editable, the [DIRECT ENTRY] key  
can be touched to manually enter a value.  
• If a metadata item requires the entry of text, a text  
entry screen will appear. Enter the required  
information.  
Note  
Touch the key of the metadata that  
you wish to use.  
2
To change the number of items that  
CANCEL  
OK  
Note  
appear at once, touch the display item  
number select key. Each time the key is  
touched, the number of items displayed  
switches between 3 and 6.  
1/2  
METADATA 2  
METADATA 4  
METADATA 6  
METADATA 8  
Touch the [OK] key.  
6
Touch the [OK] key.  
3
CANCEL  
6
OK  
CANCEL  
OK  
3
DIRECT E
1/9  
/2  
ATA 2  
ATA 4  
ATA 6  
ATA 8  
Value2  
Value4  
Value6  
Enter all items.  
7
The keys of the items stored in the  
metadata set will appear. Touch the  
key of the item that you wish to enter.  
4
READY TO SEND  
.
(METADATA SEND MODE)  
METADATA SET  
DATA ENTRY  
READY TO SEND  
.
(DATA ENTRY MODE)  
Value2  
User ID  
Pass Code  
Bill Code  
METADATA SE  
DATA ENTRY  
xxxxxx  
xxxxxx  
User ID  
Pass
Bill Code  
If you selected the wrong metadata set,  
touch the [METADATA SET] key and return  
to the screen of step 3. Metadata items  
entered to that point will not longer be  
effective.  
Note  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
Touch the [OK] key.  
8
ATA SET  
CANCEL  
OK  
1/4  
Select image settings and any other  
settings, and perform the scan send  
procedure.  
9
READY TO SEND  
.
AUTO  
ADDRESS  
BOOK  
QUALITY  
200dpi  
RESOLUTION  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
ADDRESS ENTRY  
SEND SETTINGS  
PDF-NONE  
FILE FORMAT  
A3  
DATA ENTRY  
ORIGINAL  
• The procedures for selecting settings and performing  
transmission are the same as for scan send.  
To change an entered value, touch the [DATA ENTRY] key  
again. The entry screen for the selected metadata set will  
appear.  
4
• When metadata send settings are configured, the [DATA ENTRY] key is highlighted. If you do not wish to send  
metadata, cancel the metadata settings and then perform the transmission  
• When a destination or metadata setting has been selected in data entry mode, it will not be possible to switch  
to another mode.  
Note  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION  
METADATA FIELDS  
The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.  
Data automatically generated by the machine: These data are always included in the XML file and are  
automatically stored on your computer.  
Previously defined fields:  
These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and  
assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields are selectable,  
and can only be included in the XML file if enabled in the Web  
pages.  
User defined fields:  
Custom fields can be added to the XML file. These fields are  
selectable and can be defined in the Web pages.  
If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be  
entered. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.  
Name entered in  
metadata field  
Description  
Where entered  
fromName  
Name of the user who sent the job. If the name is [SENDER NAME]  
not entered as metadata, the sender name  
determined by the usual rules for determining the  
sender name will be applied as metadata.  
(Sender name of selected sender)  
senderName  
E-mail address to which the transmission result  
will be sent.  
[SENDER NAME]  
(E-mail address of selected sender)  
documentSubject  
Job name appearing in the e-mail "Subject" line, [SUBJECT]  
or job name on the fax cover sheet. When the  
user enters a [SUBJECT] in the send settings  
screen in the touch panel, the entered value is  
applied as metadata.  
(Blank until a value is set in the send  
settings screen.)  
fileName  
Enter the file name of the image to be sent.  
[FILE NAME]  
(Only when the [Allow Custom  
Filenames] checkbox is selected  
in the metadata settings screen in  
the Web pages.)  
(Blank until a value is set in the send  
settings screen.)  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS  
To check the IP address of the machine, print out the settings list from the operation panel of the machine.  
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
1
DATA  
The system settings  
screen will appear.  
LINE  
DATA  
OB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Touch the [LIST PRINT] key.  
2
LAY  
AST  
CL  
LIST PRINT  
FA  
F
ESS  
ROL  
RECEMODE  
4
Touch the [PRINTER TEST PAGE] key.  
3
PRINTER TEST PAGE  
FAX ORT  
SENDING ADDRESS LIST  
Touch the [PRINTER SETTINGS LIST]  
key.  
4
"PRINT JOB IN  
MEMORY. PLEASE  
PRINTER  
SETTINGS LIST  
PCL SYMBO  
SET LIST  
WAIT UNTIL PRINT  
OUT." appears in the  
message screen and  
printing begins.  
PCL EXTD  
FONT L
NIC PAGE  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)  
5
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
The system settings let you adjust certain features of the machine to better suit your needs.  
The system settings consist of settings that are used by general users, and settings that can only be configured by  
an administrator of the machine.  
This chapter explains system settings (general) that can be configured by general users.  
The system settings include the following settings:  
TOTAL COUNT...........................This displays the number of pages output by the machine. (p.92)  
DISPLAY CONTRAST ................This is used to adjust the contrast of the touch panel. (p.92)  
1
LIST PRINT* ..............................This is used to print a setting list or a font list. (p.92)  
CLOCK........................................This is used to set the date and time of the machine’s built-in clock. (p.92)  
TRAY SETTINGS........................This is used to configure the paper type and paper size settings for each  
tray, and select whether or not automatic switch over to another tray with the  
same size and type of paper will take place if the paper runs out during  
continuous printing. (p.92)  
The following settings are explained in detail in the operation manual for facsimile.  
2
ADDRESS CONTROL* .............If your machine has the fax option, this setting is used to store fax numbers  
for automatic dialing. Group keys and user indexes can also be  
programmed.  
RECEIVE MODE* ......................This is used to select the fax receive mode (automatic or manual).  
2
2
FAX DATA FORWARD* ............This is used to forward faxes received in memory to another destination.  
3
KEYBOARD SELECT* ...............When using the fax or network scanner function, use this setting to change the  
layout of the keyboard in the letter entry screen. (p.92)  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS....Settings for administrators of this machine) A key appears for these settings  
in the system settings menu screen. For explanations of the settings, see "6.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)". (For explanations of  
administrator settings for the fax option, see the operation manual for  
facsimile.)  
1
* The fax option or network printer function must be installed.  
2
* The fax option must be installed.  
3
* The fax option or network scanner function must be installed.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)  
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
Touch the [OK] key in the setting  
screen to close it.  
1
3
DATA  
LINE  
DATA  
When you are ready to exit the system  
settings, touch the [EXIT] key.  
4
OB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
EXIT  
DISPLAY  
CONTRAST  
TOTAL COUNT  
LIST PRINT  
CLOCK  
ADDRESS  
CONTROL  
FAX DATA  
FORWARD  
TRAY SETTINGS  
RECEIVE MODE  
KEYBOARD  
SELECT  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
Touch the key of the desired setting.  
The setting screen will appear.  
2
Each of the system settings is explained on the  
following pages.  
The [TRAY SETTINGS] key is selected in the  
following example.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
EXIT  
DISPLAY  
CONTRAST  
TOTAL COUNT  
LIST PRINT  
CLOCK  
FAX DATA  
FORWARD  
ADDRESS  
CONTROL  
TRAY SETTINGS  
RECEIVE MODE  
KEY
SE
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
When the [TRAY SETTINGS] key is selected, the  
following screen appears.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
5
OK  
TRAY SETTINGS  
TYPE / SIZE  
COPY  
PRINT  
FAX  
1/3  
TRAY 1  
TRAY 2  
TRAY 3  
PLAIN / 8½x11  
PLAIN / 8½x14  
PLAIN / 11x17  
• When a checkbox appears next to an item  
Note  
in a screen, touch the checkbox (  
select the item. A checkmark (  
appear to indicate that the item is  
selected.  
) to  
) will  
In the above settings, tray 1 can be used  
for printer, copy, and fax mode. Tray 2 and  
tray 3 can only be used for copy mode.  
• For a detailed explanation of the trays, see  
"CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE  
AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS" (p.20).  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)  
SETTINGS  
Total count  
Keyboard select  
The total page count display shows the following  
counts:  
When using the fax or network scanner function, you  
can change the layout of the keyboard that appears in  
the letter entry screen. Select the layout that you find  
easiest to use.  
• The total count shows the combined output total of  
the copy, fax, and printer functions.  
• Total number of copies and printed pages  
• Number of pages fed through the RSPF  
• Number of two-sided copies  
The following three keyboard configurations are  
available:  
• Number of times the stapler was used  
• Number of pages sent using the network scanner  
function  
• Number of sent and received fax pages  
The counts that appear will vary depending on the  
peripheral equipment installed.  
• Keyboard 1 (QWERTY configuration)*  
• Keyboard 2 (AZERTY configuration)  
• Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF configuration)  
*The default setting is "Keyboard 1".  
(Example: Letter entry screen when Keyboard 3 is  
selected.)  
• Each sheet of paper that is 11" x 17" (A3) size is  
counted as two sheets.  
NAME  
CANCEL  
OK  
• Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-sided  
copying is counted as two sheets (11" x 17" (A3)  
paper is counted as four sheets.).  
a
k
t
b
l
u
c
m
v
d
n
w
e
o
x
f
p
y
g
q
z
h
r
i
s
j
@
ABC  
abc  
Display contrast  
AB/ab  
12#$  
ÀÄÂ/àäâ  
SPACE  
Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the touch  
panel easier to view under various lighting conditions.  
Touch the [LIGHTER] key to make the screen lighter,  
or the [DARKER] key to make the screen darker.  
List print  
Use this to print the PRINTER TEST PAGE, the FAX  
REPORT, or the SENDING ADDRESS LIST.  
Clock  
Use this to set the date and time of the machine’s  
built-in clock. The date and time are used for functions  
that require date and time information.  
Tray settings  
The paper type, paper size, and enabled modes can  
be set for each tray. Auto tray switching and disabling  
of two-sided printing on letterhead paper can also be  
set. See page 20 and 21 for details on setting the  
paper type and paper size.  
• To select which trays can be used in each of copy,  
printer, and fax modes, select the checkboxes (  
of the desired trays in each mode.  
)
• When a tray runs out of paper in the middle of a job,  
the auto tray switching function automatically  
switches the paper source to another tray that has  
the same paper size and paper type settings. (The  
auto tray switching function cannot be set for the  
bypass tray.)  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY  
If you frequently use the same settings for copy jobs, you can store in the settings in a job program. Up to 10 job  
programs can be stored, and the programs are retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently  
used copy settings in a program, you can eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a  
copy job.  
After a job program is stored, if any settings of the administrator settings related to the stored job program are  
prohibited, the related settings in the job program will not be recalled.  
If the overwriting of job programs is prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be possible to overwrite or  
delete a job program.  
To exit job program memory mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key  
on the touch panel.  
STORING A JOB PROGRAM  
Press the [#/P] key ( ).  
Select the copy settings that you wish  
to store in the program.  
1
4
The number of copies  
TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS  
[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].  
cannot be stored.  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
8½x11  
8½x14  
LOGOUT  
OUTPUT  
Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.  
Touch the [OK] key.  
2
5
The selected settings will  
be stored under the  
program number  
D PRESS  
EL].  
CANCEL  
OK  
NUMBER.  
AU
5
EXPOS
8½x11  
selected in step 3.  
AUTO  
8½x11  
PAPER SELECT  
8½x11  
8½x14  
100%  
ECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
COPY RATIO  
Touch a program number from 1 to 10  
in the storage register screen.  
3
ROGRAMS  
SS PROGRAM NUMBER.  
RECALL  
STORE  
If a numeric key is selected that has already  
been programmed, a confirmation screen  
will appear. To replace the existing program  
with the new program, touch the [STORE]  
key and continue from step 4. If you do not  
wish to replace the existing program, touch  
the [CANCEL] key to return to the above  
screen and select a different numeric key.  
Note  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)  
EXECUTING A JOB PROGRAM  
Press the [#/P] key ( ).  
Place the original, check the original  
size, and then set the number of  
copies and any other desired copy  
settings not stored in the program.  
When finished, press the [START] key  
1
3
(
).  
LOGOUT  
LOGOUT  
Touch the program number key of the  
desired program.  
2
UT  
The job program will be  
JOB PROGRAMS  
executed. A number for  
which no job program  
has been stored cannot  
be selected.  
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.  
RECALL  
DELETING A STORED JOB PROGRAM  
Press the [#/P] key ( ).  
Select the program number of the  
program to be deleted.  
1
3
If a number key for which  
EXIT  
no job program has been  
stored is selected, the  
proceed to step 4 on the  
previous page (for  
LOGOUT  
STORE/DELETE  
storing a job program).  
Touch the [DELETE] key.  
4
Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.  
2
The selected program will  
be deleted and you will  
return to the screen of step  
3. If the [CANCEL] key is  
touched, you will return to  
the screen of step 3  
without deleting the  
program.  
A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED.  
STORE ANOTHER PROGRAM?  
NUMBER.  
CANCEL  
RECALL  
DELETE  
STORE  
STORE/DELET  
ECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
If you are finished deleting programs, touch the [EXIT]  
key in the screen of step 3 to exit.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDITING MODE  
When auditing mode is enabled, a count is kept of the number of pages printed or copied by each account  
(maximum of 100 accounts). The counts can be viewed whenever necessary.  
• Auditing mode can be enabled for all modes (copy mode, fax mode, network scanner mode, and printer mode)  
Note  
in the administrator settings. (See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
To print in printer mode when auditing mode is enabled, enter your account number in the printer driver setup  
screen on your computer.  
COPYING WHEN AUDITING MODE IS ENABLED  
When auditing mode is enabled, the following account number entry screen appears.  
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.  
-----  
Enter your account number (5 digits)  
with the numeric keys.  
When the copy job is finished, press  
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).  
1
2
Each digit is indicated by  
an asterisk " ".  
The screen reverts to the  
account number entry  
screen.  
NGS  
LOGUT  
5
LOGOUT  
To perform an interrupt job when auditing  
READY TO COPY.  
0
Note  
mode is enabled, press the [INTERRUPT]  
key ( ) . The account number entry  
screen will appear. Enter your account  
number. When the interrupt job is finished,  
be sure to press the [INTERRUPT] key  
ORIGINAL  
8½x11  
AUTO  
SPECIAL M
EXPOSURE  
ACCOUNT STATUS: COPIES MADE 000,000  
COPIES REMAINING 999,999  
UTO  
8½x11  
2-SIDED
APER SELECT  
100%  
OUTPU
(
) or the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to end  
COPY RATIO  
interrupt mode.  
• If an invalid account number is entered in  
step 1, the account number entry screen  
reappears.  
• When a valid account number is entered, the  
number of copies already made by that account  
appears for several seconds on the initial screen.  
• If a limit has been set in the administrator settings for  
the number of copies that can be made by the  
account, the remaining number that can be made is  
displayed in the message display together with the  
number of copies already made. (See "6. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".)  
When ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY in  
the administrator settings is enabled (See  
"6. SYSTEM SETTINGS  
(ADMINISTRATOR)".), the following  
message will appear and operation will not  
be permitted for 1 minute if an invalid  
account number is entered 3 times in a  
row.  
PLEASE SEE YOUR ADMINISTRATOR FOR  
ASSISTANCE.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
6
PURPOSE OF THE  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
The administrator settings in the system settings are used by the administrator of the machine to customize certain  
features of the machine to better meet the needs of users.  
This chapter explains administrator settings that are common to all functions of the multifunction system (copy  
function, fax function, printer function, and network scanner function), as well as programs that are specific to the  
copy function, printer function, and network scanner function. Programs that are specific to the fax function are  
explained in the following manual:  
• Fax function ............."AR-FX7 Operation manual" (Chapter 8)  
In order to access the administrator settings, the administrator password must be entered.  
PROGRAMMING A  
ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD  
The administrator password is a 5-digit number that must be entered in order to access the administrator settings.  
The administrator of the machine should change the default administrator password that was set at the factory to a  
new 5-digit number. Be sure to remember the new administrator password, as it must be entered each time the  
administrator settings are subsequently used. (Only one administrator password can be programmed.)  
To change the administrator password, see "USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS" on the following page.  
The administrator password is initially set to "00000" at the factory.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
When using the administrator settings for the first time, change the factory default administrator password to a  
new code. (Step 3 to step 5)  
Note  
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
Use the numeric keys to enter the new  
5-digit administrator password.  
1
5
DATA  
Use a number for the  
administrator password  
that has not been  
LINE  
DATA  
OB STATUS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
-----  
00000  
programmed as an  
account number for  
auditing mode (a number  
that has been  
programmed as an  
account number cannot be used). The entered number  
will be the new administrator password. Be sure to  
remember this number.  
Touch the [ADMINISTRATOR  
SETTINGS] key.  
2
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
EXIT  
DISPLAY  
CONTRAST  
LIST PRINT  
TOTAL COUNT  
Touch the [OK] key. You will return to  
CLOCK  
6
the screen of step 4.  
ADDRESS  
CONTROL  
FAX DATA  
FORWARD  
RECEIVE MODE  
TRAY SETTINGS  
This completes the  
KEYBOARD  
SELECT  
procedure for changing  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
the administrator  
OK  
password. If you wish to  
configure another  
program, touch the key of  
the desired program in the  
screen of step 4.  
Use the numeric keys to enter the  
five-digit administrator password.  
3
4
Each time a digit is  
entered, the dash (-) that  
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to  
exit the setting.  
7
indicates the digit will  
ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD  
change to an asterisk ( ).  
The factory default setting  
for the administrator  
6
password is 00000.  
Touch a key to select the desired  
category of administrator settings.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
EXIT  
ACCOUNT  
CONTROL  
OPERATION  
SETTINGS  
ENERGY SAVE  
DEVICE CONTROL  
SCANNER  
SETTINGS  
COPY SETTINGS  
LIST PRINT  
PRINT SETTINGS  
FAX SETTINGS  
CHANGE ADMINISTRATOR  
PASSWORD  
PRODUCT KEY  
Example:  
To change the administrator password, touch the  
[CHANGE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD] key.  
• Each time you need to configure a program, use this  
procedure to select the program.  
• In the following steps, the setting screen for the  
selected program appears. Refer to the explanation  
of the program to select the desired setting (the  
explanations of the programs begin on page 103).  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
KEYS USED IN ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
Example: Auditing mode  
The following keys appear in screens that  
require the entry of numerical values.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
ACCOUNT CONTROL  
(1 999)  
20  
OK  
1/3  
AUDITING MODE  
1
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT  
2
3
RESETTING ACCOUNT  
4
5
1
When a checkbox ( ) appears in front of a setting, a checkmark ( ) will appear when the checkbox is touched.  
This indicates that the setting is enabled. If a checkbox with a checkmark ( ) is touched, the checkmark is  
cleared ( ) and the setting is disabled.  
2
3
When a key that appears in the form  
If the settings continue on the following screen(s), touch the  
is touched, the setting screen of that key will appear.  
and keys to move back and forth through the  
X X X  
screens. To return to the category selection screen, touch the [OK] key.  
The currently set numerical value is displayed.  
4
5
Numerical values can be set by touching the  
and  
keys.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTING LIST  
The administrator settings that can be accessed depend on the optional equipment that is installed.  
Note  
GENERAL PROGRAMS  
Factory default  
settings  
Factory default  
settings  
Program name  
Page  
Program name  
Page  
DEVICE CONTROL  
ACCOUNT CONTROL  
DISABLING OF  
DOCUMENT FEEDER  
Disabled  
107  
AUDITING MODE  
Disabled  
103  
103  
TOTAL PAGES PER  
ACCOUNT  
DISABLING OF DUPLEX  
DISABLING OF STAPLER  
Disabled  
Disabled  
PATTERN 1  
Disabled  
• 50%  
107  
107  
108  
108  
108  
*2  
*2  
RESETTING ACCOUNT  
103  
104  
*3  
OUTPUT TRAYS  
ACCOUNT NUMBER  
CONTROL  
DISABLING OF OFFSET  
MEMORY FOR PRINTER  
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING  
104  
104  
ACCOUNT NUMBER  
SECURITY  
Disabled  
• MEMORYAREA  
FOR PRINT  
*4  
HOLD : 30%  
CANCEL JOBS OF  
INVALID ACCOUNTS  
Disabled  
104  
*4  
DISABLING OF CENTER  
TRAY COUNTING  
Disabled  
60 (sec)  
Disabled  
108  
108  
108  
ENERGY SAVE  
RETURN FROM COPY  
MODE TIMING  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF  
Enabled  
105  
105  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF  
TIMER  
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL  
FEEDING MODE  
PREHEAT MODE SETTING  
TONER SAVE MODE  
105  
105  
SECURITY SETTINGS  
108  
109  
Disabled  
CHANGE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD  
00000  
OPERATION SETTINGS  
AUTO CLEAR SETTING  
*4  
PRODUCT KEY  
60 (sec)  
106  
106  
106  
*4  
PS3 EXPANSION KIT  
109  
109  
MESSAGE TIME SETTING 6 (sec)  
NETWORK SCANNER  
EXPANSION KIT  
*5  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND  
• KEYS TOUCH  
SOUND: Short  
• KEYS TOUCH  
SOUND AT  
INITIAL POINT:  
Disabled  
*4  
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS  
109  
109  
109  
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE *5  
6
SERIAL NUMBER  
PROGRAMS FOR COPY MODE  
TOUCH KEY OPERATION  
SETTING  
• Time to entry:  
0.0 (sec)  
• DISABLE AUTO  
KEY REPEAT:  
Disabled  
106  
106  
Factory default  
settings  
Program name  
Page  
COPY SETTINGS  
DISABLE INTERRUPT  
PRINT JOB  
Disabled  
INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS  
ROTATION COPY SETTING  
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT  
110  
110  
110  
Enabled  
STREAM FEEDING MODE Disabled  
107  
107  
• Document  
glass: 3  
DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
SETTING  
AMERICAN  
ENGLISH  
• Document  
feeder: 3  
DISABLE DISPLAY  
TIMEOUT  
Disabled  
107  
107  
107  
AUTO PAPER SELECTION  
SETTING  
PLAIN PAPER  
110  
110  
DISABLING OF TRAY  
SETTINGS  
Disabled  
Disabled  
SETTING A MAXIMUM  
NUMBER OF COPIES  
999  
DISABLING OF CLOCK  
ADJUSTMENT  
SORT AUTO SELECT  
Enabled  
Disabled  
110  
110  
DISABLING DELETION OF  
JOB PROGRAMS  
CARD SHOT SETTINGS  
110  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
PROGRAMS FOR PRINT MODE  
PROGRAMS FOR NETWORK SCANNER MODE  
Factory default  
Factory default  
Program name  
Page  
Program name  
Page  
settings  
settings  
*1  
PRINT SETTINGS  
SCANNER SETTINGS  
DEFAULT SETTINGS  
INITIAL FILE FORMAT  
SETTING  
• File type: TIFF  
• Compression  
mode: G4  
• Number of pages  
per file: All  
115  
PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE  
PRINTING  
Disabled  
111  
PRINT DENSITY LEVEL  
3
111  
111  
PROHIBIT TEST PAGE  
Disabled  
INITIAL QUALITY  
SETTING  
• Original image  
type: Text/Photo  
115  
*4  
PRINTING  
• Exposure: Auto  
ROTATED PRINT  
Enabled  
Disabled  
111  
111  
INITIAL RESOLUTION  
SETTING  
300 dpi  
115  
115  
115  
FORCED OUTPUT OF  
PRINT  
DEFAULT DISPLAY  
SETTINGS  
CONDITION  
SETTINGS  
EXCLUDE BYPASS-TRAY  
FROM ATS  
Enabled  
Disabled  
111  
111  
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT  
ADDRESS / SENDER KEYS  
DISPLAYED SETTING  
8 (keys)  
DISABLE DEFAULT  
SETTING CHANGES  
*4  
INTERFACE SETTINGS  
HEXADECIMAL DUMP  
MODE  
Disabled  
180 (sec)  
112  
112  
112  
112  
113  
*4  
I/O TIMEOUT  
*4  
60 (sec)  
USB PORT EMULATION  
PCL  
*4  
SWITCHING  
NETWORK PORT  
EMULATION SWITCHING  
AUTO  
*4  
PORT SWITCHING  
SWITCH AT  
END OF JOB  
*4  
METHOD  
*4  
ENABLE USB PORT  
Enabled  
Enabled  
113  
113  
ENABLE NETWORK  
*4  
PORT  
*4  
NETWORK SETTINGS  
IP ADDRESS SETTING  
ENABLE TCP/IP  
DHCP: Enabled  
Enabled  
113  
113  
113  
114  
114  
114  
ENABLE NetWare  
ENABLE EtherTalk  
ENABLE NetBEUI  
RESET THE NIC  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
*4  
INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS  
RESTORE FACTORY  
DEFAULTS  
114  
114  
114  
STORE CURRENT  
CONFIGURATION  
RESTORE  
CONFIGURATION  
*1 Appears when the scanner function is enabled.  
*2 Appears when a FINISHER is installed.  
*3 Can be enabled when a JOB SEPARATOR TRAY KIT  
or FINISHER and Right tray are installed.  
*4 Appears when the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is  
installed.  
*5 Appears when the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT and  
EXPANSION MEMORY are installed.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTING MENU  
The administrator settings are arranged in the following menu.  
Refer to this menu when enabling or disabling the settings that are explained beginning on page 103.  
* Some programs contain an additional level of settings (setting screen).  
Level 1  
Level 2  
Level 3  
ACCOUNT CONTROL  
AUDITING MODE  
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT  
RESETTING ACCOUNT  
ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL  
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING  
ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY  
CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS  
ENERGY SAVE  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER  
PREHEAT MODE SETTING  
TONER SAVE MODE  
OPERATION SETTINGS  
AUTO CLEAR SETTING  
MESSAGE TIME SETTING  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND  
TOUCH KEY OPERATION SETTING  
DISABLE INTERRUPT PRINT JOB  
STREAM FEEDING MODE  
DISPLAY LANGUAGE SETTING  
DISABLE DISPLAY TIMEOUT  
DISABLING OF TRAY SETTINGS  
DISABLING OF CLOCK ADJUSTMENT  
DEVICE CONTROL  
DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER  
DISABLING OF DUPLEX  
DISABLING OF STAPLER  
OUTPUT TRAYS  
6
DISABLING OF OFFSET  
MEMORY FOR PRINTER  
DISABLING OF CENTER TRAY COUNTING  
RETURN FROM COPY MODE TIMING  
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE  
SECURITY SETTINGS  
SSL SETTINGS  
ENABLE IPsec  
CHANGE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD  
PRODUCT KEY  
PS3 EXPANSION KIT  
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT  
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS  
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE  
SERIAL NUMBER  
COPY SETTINGS  
INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS  
ROTATION COPY SETTING  
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO PAPER SELECTION SETTING  
SETTING A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF COPIES  
SORT AUTO SELECT  
DISABLING DELETION OF JOB PROGRAMS  
CARD SHOT SETTINGS  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
Level 1  
Level 2  
Level 3  
PRINT SETTINGS  
DEFAULT SETTINGS  
PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING  
PRINT DENSITY LEVEL  
PROHIBIT TEST PAGE PRINTING  
ROTATED PRINT  
FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT  
EXCLUDE BYPASS-TRAY FROM ATS  
DISABLE DEFAULT SETTING  
CHANGES  
INTERFACE SETTINGS  
HEXADECIMAL DUMP MODE  
I/O TIMEOUT  
USB PORT EMULATION  
SWITCHING  
NETWORK PORT EMULATION  
SWITCHING  
PORT SWITCHING METHOD  
ENABLE USB PORT  
ENABLE NETWORK PORT  
NETWORK SETTINGS  
IP ADDRESS SETTING  
ENABLE TCP/IP  
ENABLE NetWare  
ENABLE EtherTalk  
ENABLE NetBEUI  
RESET THE NIC  
INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS  
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS  
STORE CURRENT  
CONFIGURATION  
RESTORE CONFIGURATION  
SCANNER SETTINGS  
INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING  
INITIAL QUALITY SETTING  
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING  
DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS  
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS /  
SENDER KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL PROGRAMS  
This chapter explains administrator settings that are common to all functions of the multifunction system (copy  
function, fax function, printer function, and network scanner function).  
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT  
ACCOUNT CONTROL  
This program is used to display the page counts of  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
each account. Misfed pages are not included in the  
ACCOUNT CONTROL  
OK  
page counts. When the fax and network scanner  
functions are used, the fax and network scanner page  
counts show the number of pages transmitted.  
1/3  
AUDITING MODE  
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT  
Touch the [TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT] key to  
display the page count screen.  
RESETTING ACCOUNT  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT  
OK  
"ACCOUNT CONTROL" consists of the following  
programs.  
ACCOUNT  
NUMBER  
COPIES  
(LIMIT)  
PRINTS  
SCAN  
FAX SEND  
AUDITING MODE  
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT  
RESETTING ACCOUNT  
123,456  
(150,000)  
123,456  
(150,000)  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
11111  
22222  
33333  
1/2  
(150,000)  
123,456  
44444  
ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL  
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING  
ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY  
CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS *  
* Appears when the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is  
installed.  
(150,000)  
RESETTING ACCOUNT  
This program is used to reset the page counts of each  
account to zero.  
When the fax and network scanner functions are used,  
this program resets the fax and network scanner page  
counts to zero.  
AUDITING MODE  
When AUDITING MODE is enabled, a count is kept of  
the pages printed by each account (up to 100 accounts  
can be established). The page counts can be viewed  
in the display. This program is initially disabled (factory  
default setting).  
Touch the [RESETTING ACCOUNT] key to display the  
account reset screen.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
RESETTING ACCOUNT  
OK  
COPIES  
(LIMIT)  
ACCOUNT  
NUMBER  
PRINTS  
SCAN  
FAX SEND  
After enabling "AUDITING MODE", program  
account numbers using "ACCOUNT  
NUMBER CONTROL".  
123,456  
(150,000)  
123,456  
(150,000)  
123,456  
(150,000)  
123,456  
(150,000)  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
123,456  
11111  
22222  
33333  
44444  
1/2  
Note  
ALL ACCOUNTS  
RESET  
6
When using the copy function, fax function, or network  
scanner function, an account number must be entered  
to scan an original.  
Resetting a single account  
Touch the key of the account that you wish to reset,  
and then select [YES] in the confirmation screen. If  
the account that you wish to reset does not appear,  
touch the  
key or  
key until the account  
appears. When finished, touch the [OK] key.  
Resetting all accounts  
Touch the [RESET] key and then select [YES].  
When finished, touch the [OK] key.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL  
This program is used to store, delete, and change  
account numbers for AUDITING MODE. A maximum  
of 100 account numbers can be stored.  
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING  
A limit for the number of copies that can be made can  
be set for a single account or for all accounts at once.  
The maximum limit that can be entered is 999,999.  
Touch the [ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING] key to display  
the account limit setting screen.  
Storing a new account number  
To store a new account number, touch the [ENTER]  
key and then use the numeric keys to enter a 5-digit  
account number. Touch the [ENTER] key to store  
the number. After storing the account number, you  
can continue storing other account numbers.  
Note that the same number as the administrator  
password cannot be stored.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING  
OK  
INPUT ACCOUNT NUMBER TO BE LIMITED.  
ACCOUNT  
NUMBER  
NUMBER OF  
COPIES MADE  
MAXIMUM  
---,---  
-----  
123,456  
LIMIT  
ENTER  
Deleting an account number  
Setting a limit for a single account  
To delete an account number, touch the [DELETE]  
key and then select whether you wish to delete a  
single account number or all account numbers.  
To delete a single account number, use the numeric  
keys to enter the account number that you wish to  
delete and then touch the [ENTER] key.  
To delete all account numbers, touch the [DELETE]  
key and then touch [YES] in the screen that appears  
to confirm the deletion.  
Use the numeric keys to enter the number of the  
account for which you wish to set a limit, and then  
enter the limit. When finished, touch the [ENTER]  
key.  
If you enter an account number that already has a  
limit, the limit will appear in the display. To change  
the limit, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) (the display will  
change to hyphens (-)) and then enter the new limit.  
If you touch the [ENTER] key while the display  
shows hyphens (-) for the limit, the limit set for the  
account will be canceled. When you have finished  
setting a limit for one account, you can continue  
setting limits for other accounts.  
Changing an account number  
To change an account number, touch the  
[CHANGE] key and use the numeric keys to enter  
the account number that you wish to change. Enter  
the new account number and then touch the  
[ENTER] key. After changing the account number,  
you can continue changing other account numbers.  
If you make a mistake while entering the account  
number that you wish to change and enter a number  
that is not in use, an alarm will sound and the display  
will change to hyphens (-).  
When finished, touch the [OK] key to exit.  
Setting a limit for all accounts  
Touch the [LIMIT] key. [ALL] will appear in the  
account number entry screen.  
Enter a limit for all accounts in the same way as  
explained above for a single account.  
When finished, touch the [OK] key to exit.  
ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY  
This program is used to display an alarm and prohibit  
entry of account numbers for one minute if an incorrect  
account number is entered three times in a row when  
"AUDITING MODE" is enabled. (This prevents  
unauthorized people from attempting to guess an  
account number.)  
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).  
CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS  
This program is used to control use of the printer  
function when "AUDITING MODE" is enabled. When  
this program is enabled, the machine will not print a  
print job if the operator enters an invalid account  
number at the computer or fails to enter an account  
number.  
When the program is disabled, print jobs received  
without the entry of a valid account number will be  
printed and the number of pages will be included in the  
[OTHERS] count.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
PREHEAT MODE SETTING  
ENERGY SAVE  
If the printer is not used for the length of time set with  
this program after printing is finished, it will enter  
preheat mode. This function reduces your power  
costs, and at the same time helps conserve natural  
resources and reduce pollution.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
ENERGY SAVE  
OK  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF  
60min  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER  
PREHEAT MODE SETTING  
Select the most suitable setting to match your pattern  
of use of the printer.  
15min  
The time can be set to as long as 240 minutes in  
increments of one minute. (Preheat mode cannot be  
disabled.)  
"ENERGY SAVE" provides the following four programs  
to reduce your power costs. From an environmental  
perspective, this also helps conserve natural  
resources and reduce pollution.  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER  
PREHEAT MODE SETTING  
TONER SAVE MODE  
The toner save mode will reduce toner consumption by  
approximately 10% in the automatic, text, and  
text/photo exposure modes. Copies will be lighter but  
still adequate for general use. Selection of this mode  
has no effect on the photo and super photo modes.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
TONER SAVE MODE  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF  
If the machine is not used for the amount of time set in  
"AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER", AUTO POWER  
SHUT-OFF will activate and switch the machine to a  
standby state that conserves the maximum amount of  
energy. This program can be used to prevent AUTO  
POWER SHUT-OFF from operating. When this is  
done, the "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER" setting  
is disabled. Use this program when circumstances  
require that AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF be disabled.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
Rather than disabling the auto power  
shut-off feature, we suggest that you  
Caution  
first try lengthening the time set in  
"AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER" In  
most cases a suitable timer setting  
will allow work to proceed with  
minimal delay and still enable you to  
enjoy the benefits of power  
6
conservation.  
AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER  
This program is used to set the amount of time after  
which "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF" activates when the  
machine is not used.  
This function allows you to reduce power costs, and at  
the same time helps conserve natural resources and  
reduce pollution.  
The time can be set to as long as 240 minutes in  
increments of one minute.  
• Select a suitable time according to your  
pattern of use of the machine.  
Note  
• If "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF" is disabled,  
the time setting is also disabled.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND  
This program is used to select whether or not a beep is  
sounded when a key is touched, and if sounded, what  
type of beep.  
OPERATION SETTINGS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
OPERATION SETTINGS  
OK  
The program is also use to select whether or not a  
special key touch beep is sounded at the initial point of  
a setting.  
The factory default settings are as follows:  
• KEYS TOUCH SOUND: Short  
1/3  
60sec  
6sec  
AUTO CLEAR SETTING  
MESSAGE TIME SETTING  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND  
• KEYS TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT: Disabled  
The "OPERATION SETTINGS" are related to basic  
operation of the machine and consist of the following  
programs:  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND  
OK  
AUTO CLEAR SETTING  
MESSAGE TIME SETTING  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND  
TOUCH KEY OPERATION SETTING  
DISABLE INTERRUPT PRINT JOB  
STREAM FEEDING MODE  
DISPLAY LANGUAGE SETTING  
DISABLE DISPLAY TIMEOUT  
DISABLING OF TRAY SETTINGS  
DISABLING OF CLOCK ADJUSTMENT  
KEYS TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT  
key.... Touch this key to select a short beep  
volume. A single short beep indicates a  
valid key, and a double short beep indicates  
an invalid key.  
key.... Touch this key to select a long beep  
volume. A single long beep indicates a valid  
key, and a double long beep indicates an  
invalid key.  
AUTO CLEAR SETTING  
If no action is taken for a certain length of time when  
viewing information on finished jobs, jobs in progress,  
or stored jobs, the auto clear function activates and  
returns the display to the initial screen of copy mode or  
the job status screen. AUTO CLEAR SETTING is used  
to set the amount of time that must elapse for the auto  
clear function to activate. The time can be set from 10  
seconds to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds,  
or the auto clear function can be disabled. (This setting  
only operates in copy mode and network scanner  
mode.)  
key .... Touch this key to disable key touch beeps.  
Select the [KEYS TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT]  
checkbox to have three long beeps sound (when the  
beep volume is set to long) or three short beeps sound  
(when the beep volume is set to short) when the initial  
point of a setting is reached while selecting basic settings.  
The initial point settings are as follows:  
Mode  
Initial point (set from initial screen)  
The factory default setting is "60" (sec.).  
Copy mode  
Ratio: 100%  
Exposure: 3  
MESSAGE TIME SETTING  
Fax mode  
Exposure: 3  
This program is used to set the length of time that  
messages appear in the display (this applies to  
messages that appear for a certain length of time and  
then automatically disappear.)  
Network scanner Exposure setting: 3  
mode  
TOUCH KEY OPERATION SETTING  
These programs are used to set the length of time that  
must elapse until a setting is entered after a key is  
touched, and to disable key repeat.  
The time can be set to as long as 12 seconds in  
increments of one second.  
The factory default setting is "6" (sec.).  
The setting entry time can be set from 0.0 seconds to  
2.0 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds.  
When [DISABLE AUTO KEY REPEAT] is enabled, only  
one touch is registered if key is touched continuously.  
The factory default settings are as follows:  
• Time to entry: 0.0 (sec.)  
• DISABLE AUTO KEY REPEAT: Disabled  
DISABLE INTERRUPT PRINT JOB  
(When the printer function is enabled)  
Enable this program if you wish to prevent pausing of  
printing for interrupt copy jobs.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
STREAM FEEDING MODE  
DEVICE CONTROL  
Use this program to enable stream feeding mode.  
When this mode is enabled and originals are scanned  
from the RSPF, an original can be added to the RSPF  
within 5 seconds after the previous original is fed, and  
be automatically scanned using the settings of the  
previous original. This function can be used with the  
copy function and the scanner function.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
DEVICE CONTROL  
OK  
1/3  
DISABLING OF DOCUMENT  
FEEDER  
DISABLING OF DUPLEX  
DISABLING OF STAPLER  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
Use these programs when a peripheral device on the  
machine has failed or when you wish to temporarily  
disable a device. The programs can also be used to  
change the function setting of a device as required by  
your conditions of use.  
DISPLAY LANGUAGE SETTING  
This program is used to change the language used in  
the display.  
The factory default setting is "AMERICAN ENGLISH".  
"DEVICE CONTROL" consists of the following  
programs:  
DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER  
DISABLING OF DUPLEX  
DISABLING OF STAPLER  
OUTPUT TRAYS  
DISABLING OF OFFSET  
DISABLE DISPLAY TIMEOUT  
When this program is disabled, the display will close  
the screen that is currently open and return to the  
initial screen if no keys are touched for 60 seconds.  
When the program is enabled, the display will not  
close the screen that is currently open.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
MEMORY FOR PRINTER  
DISABLING OF CENTER TRAY COUNTING  
RETURN FROM COPY MODE TIMING  
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE  
SECURITY SETTINGS  
DISABLING OF TRAY SETTINGS  
This program can be enabled to prohibit changes to  
the paper tray settings in the system settings  
(general).  
Note that bypass tray settings will still be possible.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER  
Use this program when the RSPF is not operational or  
you wish to disable the automatic feeding function.  
(Originals can still be scanned using the document  
glass.)  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
DISABLING OF CLOCK ADJUSTMENT  
This program can be enabled to prohibit adjustment of  
the "CLOCK" setting in the system settings.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
6
DISABLING OF DUPLEX  
Use this program when you wish to disable the  
two-sided printing function or the function has failed.  
When this program is enabled, only one-sided printing  
is possible.This program is initially disabled (factory  
default setting).  
DISABLING OF STAPLER  
(When a FINISHER is installed)  
Use this program to disable stapling.  
When this program is enabled, stapling does not take  
place.This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
OUTPUT TRAYS  
RETURN FROM COPY MODE TIMING  
(When a JOB SEPARATOR TRAY KIT or  
FINISHER and Right tray are installed)  
(When the printer function or fax function is enabled)  
This program is used to set the amount of time that  
must elapse after a copy job is finished before the  
printer or fax function resumes operation. The amount  
of time can be set from 1 second to 60 seconds in  
increments of 1 second.  
This program is used to select the respective output  
trays for the copy, printer, and fax functions.  
The factory default setting is "PATTERN 1".  
Example:When a FINISHER and Right tray are  
installed  
The factory default setting is "60" (sec.).  
* Settings that can be selected vary depending on the  
options that are installed.  
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE  
When this program is enabled, originals of mixed  
length (the widths must be the same) can be scanned  
in copy mode and each original copied onto the  
corresponding length of paper.  
Settings  
PATTERN 1  
Description  
Printer: Offset tray  
Fax: Right tray  
Copy: Offset tray  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
PATTERN 2  
Printer: Right tray  
Fax: Right tray  
Copy: Offset tray  
SECURITY SETTINGS  
The following settings are related to security. Touch  
the [SECURITY SETTINGS] key to configure the  
settings.  
PATTERN 3  
(When the fax  
function is enabled)  
Printer: Offset tray  
Fax: Right tray  
Copy: Offset tray  
When any of these settings are changed, you must exit  
the administrator settings, turn off the main switch,  
wait a brief interval, and then turn the main switch back  
on to make the new settings take effect.  
DISABLING OF OFFSET  
(When the FINISHER is installed)  
This program is used to enable or disable the offset  
functions of the offset tray.  
SSL SETTINGS  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
SSL can be used for data transmission over a  
network.  
SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of  
information communicated over a network.  
Encrypting data makes it possible to transmit and  
receive sensitive information safely.  
MEMORY FOR PRINTER  
This program is used to set the amount of IMC  
memory that is allocated to the printer function. The  
amount of memory can be set from 30% to 70% in  
increments of 10%.  
HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP  
communication.  
IPP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP communication.  
The factory default settings are as follows:  
• 50 (%)  
• THE MEMORY AREA FOR PRINT HOLD: 30 (%)  
ENABLE IPsec  
IPsec can be used for data transmission/reception  
on a network. When IPsec is used, data can be sent  
and received safely without the need to configure  
settings for IP packet encryption in a Web browser  
or other higher-level application.  
This setting is only used to enable or disable IPsec;  
detailed IPsec settings are configured in the Web  
pages.  
Some Web page settings may not allow connection  
to the machine, or the settings may not allow  
printing, scanning, or Web page display. In this  
case, deselect [ENABLE IPsec] in this screen and  
change the Web page settings.  
Memory allocated to print hold  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
To set the amount of memory allocated to print hold,  
touch the [THE MEMORY AREA FOR PRINT  
HOLD] key. The amount of memory can be set from  
30% to 70% in increments of 10%. If 0% is selected,  
the print hold function cannot be used.  
DISABLING OF CENTER TRAY  
COUNTING  
This program is used to disable counting of pages  
delivered to the center tray.  
When this program is enabled, center tray full  
detection does not take place.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
OK  
SECURITY SETTINGS  
SSL SETTINGS  
ENABLE IPsec  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
CHANGE ADMINISTRATOR  
PASSWORD  
PRODUCT KEY  
(When the PRINTER  
EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
This program is used to change the administrator  
password that must be entered to configure the  
administrator settings. When the machine is first used,  
the administrator of the machine should change the  
administrator password that was set at the factory to  
the desired 5-digit code. (A number that has been  
programmed as an account number cannot be used.)  
Only one administrator password can be programmed.  
The factory default setting for the administrator  
password is 00000.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
OK  
PRODUCT KEY  
PS3 EXPANSION KIT  
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT  
SERIAL NUMBER  
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS  
Use these programs to enter the product keys for the  
following options.  
PS3 EXPANSION KIT  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is  
installed)  
This program is used to enter the product key that  
enables the machine to be used as a PostScript  
printer. Ask your dealer for the product key.  
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT and  
EXPANSION MEMORY are installed)  
This program is used to enter the product key for the  
network scanner function. Ask your dealer for the  
product key.  
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is  
installed)  
This program is used to enter the product key for  
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS, which enables  
customer product support via a network system. Ask  
your dealer for the product key.  
6
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT and  
EXPANSION MEMORY are installed)  
This setting is used to enter the product key that allows  
use of the metadata send function.  
Ask your dealer for the product key.  
SERIAL NUMBER  
Use this program to display the serial number of the  
machine. The serial number is required when  
obtaining product keys for PS3 EXPANSION KIT,  
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT,  
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE and the  
E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PROGRAMS FOR COPY MODE  
This chapter explains the administrator settings that are used for copy mode.  
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT  
COPY SETTINGS  
This program is used to adjust the exposure level  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
when "Auto" is used for the copy exposure.  
COPY FUNCTION SETTINGS  
OK  
The auto exposure level can be set separately for the  
document glass and RSPF.  
1/3  
INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS  
[1] is the lightest level and [5] is the darkest level.  
The factory default settings are as follows:  
• Document glass: 3  
ROTATION COPY SETTING  
AE:3  
AE:3  
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT  
• Document feeder: 3  
"COPY SETTINGS" consists of the following  
programs:  
INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS  
ROTATION COPY SETTING  
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO PAPER SELECTION SETTING  
SETTING A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF COPIES  
SORT AUTO SELECT  
DISABLING DELETION OF JOB PROGRAMS  
CARD SHOT SETTINGS  
AUTO PAPER SELECTION SETTING  
This program is used to select the paper type* that is  
used when the automatic paper selection function  
operates. "PLAIN PAPER" or "PLAIN AND RECYCLE  
PAPER" can be selected. Auto paper selection can  
also be disabled with this program.  
The factory default setting is "PLAIN PAPER".  
* The paper type set for each tray in the tray settings of  
the system settings (general). (See "5. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (GENERAL)".)  
INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS  
The copy settings revert to the default settings when  
the power switch is turned on, when the [CLEAR ALL]  
key ( ) is pressed, or when the auto clear time  
elapses. This program is used to change the default  
settings, or return changed default settings to the initial  
factory default settings.  
SETTING A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF  
COPIES  
This program is used to set the maximum number of  
copies that are allowed per original.  
Any number from 1 to 999 can be set for the  
maximum.  
Defaults for the following copy settings can be  
changed:  
The factory default setting is "999".  
• Paper tray  
• Copy ratio  
• Exposure mode  
• Duplex function  
SORT AUTO SELECT  
This program can be used to disable automatic  
selection of the sort function.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
• Post-processing functions* (non-sort, sort, staple  
sort, and group)  
*Settings for the post-processing functions vary  
depending on whether or not a FINISHER is  
installed.  
DISABLING DELETION OF JOB  
PROGRAMS  
This program is used to prevent copy settings stored in  
job programs from being changed or deleted.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
If this program is used to change the default  
setting for the duplex function to other than  
Note  
"one-sided" "one-sided" and the RSPF  
fails or is disabled, the setting will revert to  
"one-sided" "one-sided".  
* DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER (p.107)  
DISABLING OF DUPLEX (p.107)  
CARD SHOT SETTINGS  
ROTATION COPY SETTING  
This program is used to set the initial original card size  
for the card shot function. Entry of the X dimension  
(width) is initially selected. Touch the keys to enter the  
Y dimension (length) in the same way. To have "FIT  
TO PAGE" be initially selected when the card shot  
screen is opened, touch the [FIT TO PAGE] key.  
When this program is enabled, the original image is  
automatically rotated 90 degrees in the event that the  
original and the paper are in different orientations.  
(Rotation can only take place when auto paper  
selection and automatic ratio selection are used.)  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PROGRAMS FOR PRINT MODE  
This chapter explains administrator settings that are used for the printer function. These programs can only be  
configured on models that have the printer function.  
FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT  
PRINT SETTINGS  
This program is used to enable or disable automatic  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
printing on a different size of paper when no paper  
PRINT SETTINGS  
OK  
trays have the selected size of paper.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
DEFAULT SETTINGS  
NETWORK SETTINGS  
INTERFACE SETTINGS  
INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE  
SETTINGS  
EXCLUDE BYPASS-TRAY FROM ATS  
This program is used to exclude paper in the bypass  
tray when automatic paper selection is used.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
DEFAULT SETTINGS  
These programs allow you to change certain default  
settings for the printer function.  
The "DEFAULT SETTINGS" consist of the following  
programs:  
PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING  
PRINT DENSITY LEVEL  
DISABLE DEFAULT SETTING  
CHANGES  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
This program is used to prevent the configuration  
setting defaults from being changed.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
PROHIBIT TEST PAGE PRINTING  
ROTATED PRINT  
FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT  
EXCLUDE BYPASS-TRAY FROM ATS  
DISABLE DEFAULT SETTING CHANGES  
PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING  
This program is used to prohibit the printing of notice  
pages. For an explanation of notice pages, see "If a  
Notice Page is printed" in the online manual for printer.  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
6
PRINT DENSITY LEVEL  
The print density can be set to one of five different  
levels. [1] is the lightest level and [5] is the darkest  
level.  
The factory default setting is "3".  
PROHIBIT TEST PAGE PRINTING  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
This program is used to prohibit the printing of test  
pages.  
When the program is enabled, a test page cannot be  
printed from the system settings (general).  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
ROTATED PRINT  
This program is used to enable or disable rotation of  
the print image when an A4R, B5R, or 8-1/2 x 11R  
(Letter R) document is being printed but there is no  
paper loaded in that orientation.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
USB PORT EMULATION SWITCHING  
INTERFACE SETTINGS  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
The "INTERFACE SETTINGS" are used to monitor  
and set limits for the data that is sent to the machine’s  
USB port or network port. The settings consist of the  
following programs:  
HEXADECIMAL DUMP MODE  
I/O TIMEOUT  
This program is used to set the printer language when  
the machine is connected using the USB port.  
The factory default setting is "PCL*".  
* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed, the setting is  
"AUTO".  
USB PORT EMULATION SWITCHING  
NETWORK PORT EMULATION SWITCHING  
PORT SWITCHING METHOD  
ENABLE USB PORT  
ENABLE NETWORK PORT  
Unless printing errors occur frequently, it is  
recommended that the setting be kept at "AUTO".  
Selections  
AUTO  
Description  
The printer language is  
automatically changed to match  
the data received from the  
computer.  
HEXADECIMAL DUMP MODE  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
PostScript  
The data received from the  
This program is used to print out the print data from the  
computer in hexadecimal and in the corresponding text  
characters (based on ASCII code). This allows you to  
check whether or not print data is being correctly sent  
from the computer.  
(When the PS3 computer is printed using  
EXPANSION  
PostScript.  
KIT is installed)  
PCL  
The data received from the  
This program is initially disabled (factory default  
setting).  
computer is printed using PCL.  
NETWORK PORT EMULATION  
SWITCHING  
Example of output in hexadecimal dump mode (A4  
portrait)  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
This program is used to set the printer language when  
the machine is connected using the USB port. The  
selections are the same as for "USB PORT  
EMULATION SWITCHING".  
The factory default setting is "AUTO".  
Unless printing errors occur frequently, it is  
recommended that the setting be kept at "AUTO".  
I/O TIMEOUT  
This program is used to set the amount of time until I/O  
timeout when waiting for print data.  
In the event that the set amount of time elapses  
without the port receiving any print data, the I/O  
timeout function temporarily breaks the port  
connection and intiates automatic port selection or  
makes the port begin waiting for the next set of print  
data.  
The factory default settings are as follows:  
• 180 (sec.)  
• When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed:  
60 (sec.)  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
PORT SWITCHING METHOD  
NETWORK SETTINGS  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
This program is used to set the method for switching  
printer ports.  
The machine can use the following three printer ports:  
• USB port  
The NETWORK SETTINGS are used when the  
machine is used as a network printer. The "NETWORK  
SETTINGS" consist of the following programs:  
IP ADDRESS SETTING  
• Network port  
ENABLE TCP/IP  
The factory default setting is "SWITCH AT END OF  
JOB".  
ENABLE NetWare  
ENABLE EtherTalk  
ENABLE NetBEUI  
RESET THE NIC  
Selections  
Description  
SWITCH AT  
END OF JOB  
Automatic printer port selection  
at the end of each print job.  
Consult your network administrator  
before configuring the NETWORK  
SETTINGS.  
Caution  
SWITCHAFTER Automatic printer port selection if  
I/O TIMEOUT  
the time set in "I/O TIMEOUT"  
elapses.  
• After changing the settings, you must turn  
Note  
off the machine’s power switch, wait  
briefly, and then turn the switch back on in  
order to make the changes take effect.  
• Some programs in the following are  
marked by "*1". This indicates that a  
message will appear at the end of the  
setting procedure asking you to confirm  
execution of the new setting. If needed,  
you can cancel the new setting by  
touching the [NO] key.  
ENABLE USB PORT  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
This program is used to enable or disable printing via  
the USB port.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
ENABLE NETWORK PORT  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
IP ADDRESS SETTING  
This program is used to enable or disable printing via  
the network port.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
This program is used to set the IP address (IP  
address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway) of the machine  
when TCP/IP protocol is used on the network.  
When "DHCP" is selected, the machine will obtain an IP  
address automatically. This is the factory default setting.  
When the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be  
sure to enable the "ENABLE TCP/IP" program.  
When DHCP is used, the IP address  
assigned to the machine may  
automatically be changed on  
occasion. If this happens, printing  
will not be possible.  
6
Caution  
This setting is only effective in a network  
Note  
environment that uses Ipv4 TCP/IP protocol.  
To set an IP address on a Ipv6 TCP/IP  
network, use the Web pages. In an IPv6  
environment, the machine can use LPD or  
IPP protocol.  
ENABLE TCP/IP  
This program must be enabled to use the machine on  
a TCP/IP network. "IP ADDRESS SETTING" must  
also be configured.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default setting).  
ENABLE NetWare  
This program must be enabled to use the machine on  
a network that uses NetWare protocol.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default setting).  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)  
ENABLE EtherTalk  
INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS  
This program must be enabled to use the machine on  
a network that uses EtherTalk protocol.  
(When the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT is installed)  
These programs are used to return the configuration  
settings (See the online manual for network printer)  
and the "PRINT SETTINGS" (p.111) to the factory  
default settings. The programs are also used to store  
the current settings and to restore stored settings.  
"INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS" consists of  
the following programs:  
This program is initially enabled (factory default setting).  
ENABLE NetBEUI  
This program must be enabled to use the machine on  
a network that uses NetBEUI protocol.  
This program is initially enabled (factory default  
setting).  
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS  
STORE CURRENT CONFIGURATION  
RESTORE CONFIGURATION  
*1  
RESET THE NIC  
This program is used to restore all network settings to  
the factory default settings.  
Some programs in the following are marked  
Note  
by "*1". This indicates that a message will  
appear at the end of the setting procedure  
asking you to confirm execution of the new  
setting. If needed, you can cancel the new  
setting by touching the [NO] key.  
*1  
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS  
This program is used to return the configuration  
settings (see the online manual for network printer)  
and the "PRINT SETTINGS" (p.111) to the factory  
default settings. If you need a record of the current  
settings before restoring the factory defaults, use  
"Data list print" in the system settings (general) to print  
a list of the current settings. (See "4. SYSTEM  
SETTINGS (GENERAL)".)  
*1  
STORE CURRENT CONFIGURATION  
This program is used to store the current configuration  
settings (see online manual for network printer) and  
"PRINT SETTINGS" (p.111). The stored settings will  
not be erased even if the power is turned off. To  
restore the stored settings, use the "RESTORE  
CONFIGURATION" program.  
*1  
RESTORE CONFIGURATION  
This program is used to restore settings that were  
stored using the "STORE CURRENT  
CONFIGURATION" program.  
The current settings will change to the restored  
settings.  
If any of the "NETWORK SETTINGS"  
Note  
(p.113) were changed before execution of  
this program, you must turn off the  
machine’s power switch, wait briefly, and  
then turn the switch back on in order to  
make the settings take effect.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PROGRAMS FOR NETWORK  
SCANNER MODE  
This chapter explains administrator settings that are used for the network scanner function. These programs can  
only be configured on models that have the network scanner function.  
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS /  
SENDER KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING  
This program is used to select the number of  
SCANNER SETTINGS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
SCANNER SETTINGS  
OK  
one-touch keys that are displayed in the address book  
screen and sender selection screen. Selections are  
[6], [8], and [12].  
1/2  
INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING  
INITIAL QUALITY SETTING  
The factory default setting is "8" (keys).  
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING  
Each displayed one-touch key name can be  
Note  
up to 18 characters long when the number  
of displayed one-touch keys is 6 or 8. Each  
name can only be 10 characters long when  
the number of displayed one-touch keys is  
12.  
The "SCANNER SETTINGS" consist of the following  
programs:  
INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING  
INITIAL QUALITY SETTING  
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING  
DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS  
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS / SENDER  
KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING  
INITIAL FILE FORMAT SETTING  
Use this program to change the default file format (file  
type, compression mode, and number of pages per  
file) that is used when sending an image by Scan to  
E-mail, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to FTP.  
The factory default settings are as follows:  
• File type: TIFF  
• Compression mode: G4  
• Number of pages per file: All  
INITIAL QUALITY SETTING  
This program is used to set the default original type  
and exposure level for network scanner mode.  
For information on these settings, see "4. NETWORK  
SCANNER FUNCTION".  
6
The factory default settings are as follows:  
• Original image type: Text/Photo  
• Exposure: Auto  
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING  
This program is used to set the default resolution for  
network scanner mode.  
The factory default setting is "300" (dpi).  
DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS  
Use this program to select the initial screen that  
appears when the [SCAN] key is pressed to switch to  
network scanner mode, or when the [CLEAR ALL] key  
(
) is pressed in scanner mode.  
Three selections are available for the initial screen:  
• CONDITION SETTINGS  
• ADDRESS BOOK (ABC)  
• ADDRESS BOOK (GROUP)  
The factory default setting is "CONDITION SETTINGS".  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
7
This chapter describes troubleshooting and maintenance such as misfeed removal, replacing the toner cartridge and  
cleaning the machine.  
DISPLAY MESSAGES.................................................................................................................. 117  
TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................................................................. 119  
Trouble  
Page  
Problems related to machine operation  
The machine does not operate.  
The power is on but copying is not possible.  
Two-sided copying is not possible.  
119  
Wrong paper size is displayed for paper in the bypass tray.  
A copy job stops before it is finished.  
The contrast of the touch panel is too high or too low.  
Image cannot be rotated.  
Original size is not selected automatically, or copying does not take place on paper that matches the original size.  
Paper size for a paper tray cannot be set.  
Order of copies is incorrect.  
The job is canceled after the originals were being scanned.  
Not all pages are copied.  
120  
121  
The RSPF cannot be used.  
Lighting fixture flickers.  
Paper feeding problems  
When using paper fed from the bypass tray, the copied image is skewed.  
Paper from the bypass tray misfeeds.  
Paper misfeeds.  
Output does not collect neatly in the output tray of the finisher.  
Stapled output does not collect neatly.  
Image quality problems  
Copies are too dark or too light.  
Text is not clear in a copy.  
Part of the copied image is cut off.  
122  
Blank copies.  
Paper is wrinkled or the copied image comes off when the paper surface is rubbed.  
Copies are smudged or dirty.  
White or black lines appear copies.  
MISFEED REMOVAL.................................................................................................................... 127  
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE ..................................................................................... 134  
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT...................................................................................... 135  
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY AND TOTAL COUNT....................................................... 137  
CLEANING THE MACHINE.......................................................................................................... 137  
DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF............................................................................................................................... 137  
THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER............................................................................................................. 138  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DISPLAY MESSAGES  
If one of the following messages appears in the display, take prompt action as instructed by the message.  
Message  
Cause and solution  
Page  
95  
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT  
NUMBER.  
Auditing mode is enabled. Enter your account number.  
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.  
Remove the misfeed as explained in "MISFEED REMOVAL".  
127  
2-SIDED COPIES CANNOT BE  
MADE ON THIS PAPER TYPE.  
This appears when you attempt to make two-sided copies on special  
paper that cannot be used for two-sided copying. Cancel two-sided  
copying or change the paper.  
16, 28  
REMOVE PAPER FROM THE  
<*>TRAY.  
The indicated output tray is full. Remove the output from the tray.  
(<*> indicates the tray that is full.)  
-
-
CLOSE THE <**> COVER.  
The indicated cover is open. Close the cover. (<**> indicates the  
cover that is open.)  
PLEASE EXTEND BYPASS-TRAY.  
When copying from the bypass tray, be sure to pull out the bypass  
tray extension.  
19  
COVER SHEETS MUST BE THE  
SAME SIZE AS THE COPY  
PAPER USED.  
When adding a cover, load paper in the bypass tray that is the  
same size as the paper in the tray selected for copying.  
49  
PREPARE A NEW ONE.  
The toner cartridge must be prepared.  
134  
134  
134  
134  
TONER SUPPLY IS LOW.  
The toner cartridge must be replaced soon.  
CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE.  
CHECK THE TONER CARTRIDGE.  
The toner cartridge is out of toner. Replace the toner cartridge.  
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly.  
THE DOCUMENT FEEDER IS  
DISABLED.  
The RSPF has been disabled in the administrator settings. Use  
the document glass.  
23  
SELECTED PAPER TRAY IS  
PROHIBITED. PLEASE SELECT  
ANOTHER PAPER TRAY.  
This appears when a tray is selected that has been prohibited in  
"TRAY SETTINGS" in the system settings.  
92  
PLEASE CHECK THE PAPER  
SIZE OF TRAY <***>.  
The tray's paper size setting is different from the actual paper size.  
Load the correct size of paper. The tray is indicated in <***>.  
16  
ADD STAPLES.  
The finisher is out of staples. Replace the staple cartridge as  
explained in "STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT".  
135  
133  
PLEASE REMOVE PAPER FROM Paper remains in the stapler compiler. Remove the paper.  
THE STAPLER COMPILER.  
MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] The memory becomes full while scanning originals. Press the  
7
TO BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO  
CANCEL.  
[START] key ( ) to copy only the originals that have been  
scanned, or press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to cancel the job.  
-
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Message  
Cause and solution  
Page  
SELECTED PAPER TRAY IS OUT  
OF SERVICE.  
Contact your SHARP service center.  
-
CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR  
STAPLE JAM.  
Staples are jammed in the finisher or the staple case is not  
attached correctly. Check the staple case. If the message still  
appears after removing the jammed staples, disable the stapler  
using "DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the administrator settings  
(See "6. SYSTEM SETTINGS (ADMINISTRATOR)".), and contact  
your SHARP service center.  
136  
(CALL FOR SERVICE SOON.)  
(MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.)  
It will soon be time for regular maintenance. Contact your SHARP  
service center.  
-
-
It is time for regular maintenance. Contact your SHARP service  
center.  
CALL FOR SERVICE.  
CODE:  
Turn off the power and then turn it back on. If this does not clear  
the message, write down the 2-digit main code and 2-digit  
sub-code and promptly contact your SHARP service center.  
-
-
PLEASE CHECK THE ORIGINAL  
SIZE. JOB IS CANCELED.  
The original in the RSPF is longer than the size that was detected.  
Reinsert the original, make sure that the size indicated in the  
touch panel is the same as the actual size, and begin copying. You  
can also select mixed feeding to copy onto paper that matches  
each original size after all originals have been scanned.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
If you experience difficulty using the machine, check the following troubleshooting guide before calling for service.  
Many problems can be easily resolved by the user. If you are unable to solve the problem using the troubleshooting  
guide, turn off the power switch, unplug the machine, and contact your SHARP service center. The following  
problems are related to the general operation of the machine and copying.  
For problems related to the printer, fax, and network scanner functions, see the corresponding operation manuals.  
Problems related to machine operation  
Problem  
Cause and solution  
Page  
Power switch OFF.  
Turn the power switch ON.  
14  
The machine is warming up.  
The machine requires about 23 seconds (MX-M260) or 25  
seconds (MX-M310) to warm up after the power switch is turned  
on. While the machine is warming up, copy settings can be  
selected but copying is not possible. Wait until "READY TO  
COPY." appears.  
14  
The machine does not operate.  
Out of paper.  
Load paper.  
18  
Out of toner.  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
134  
127  
Misfeed occurs.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.  
If only the [START] key ( ) blinks, auto power shut-off mode has  
activated. Press the [START] key ( ) to return the machine to  
normal operation.  
15  
11  
28  
The power is on but copying is not  
possible.  
Copy mode is not selected.  
Press the [COPY] key to select copy mode.  
Automatic two-sided copying was attempted on paper  
that is not suitable for automatic two-sided copying.  
Two-sided copying is not possible on special paper. Use paper  
that is suitable for automatic two-sided copying.  
Two-sided copying is not possible.  
Two-sided copying is prohibited in the administrator  
settings.  
Change the setting in the administrator settings to permit  
two-sided copying.  
107  
19  
7
The bypass tray extension is not pulled out.  
To detect the paper size correctly, the bypass tray extension  
must be pulled out when the paper is loaded.  
Wrong paper size is displayed for  
paper in the bypass tray.  
Too many pages have accumulated in the output tray,  
causing the tray full sensor to activate. Further  
copying is not possible until the pages are removed.  
Remove the pages from the output tray.  
A copy job stops before it is  
finished.  
-
The display contrast has not been adjusted.  
Adjust the contrast using "DISPLAY CONTRAST" in the system  
settings.  
The contrast of the touch panel is  
too high or too low.  
92  
Neither auto paper selection nor auto image mode are  
selected.  
Rotation copy functions only if auto paper select mode or auto  
image mode is selected.  
26, 31  
Image cannot be rotated.  
Rotation copy is prohibited in the administrator  
settings.  
110  
Change the setting in the administrator settings to permit rotation  
copying.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Problem  
Cause and solution  
Page  
The RSPF was not opened completely when the  
original was placed on the document glass.  
Open the RSPF completely, place the original on the document  
glass, and close the RSPF.  
-
The original contains large black solid areas.  
If the original contains any large black solid areas, the original  
size may not be detected automatically. Use the [SPECIAL  
MODES] key to select the original size.  
48  
23  
Original size is not selected  
automatically, or copying does not  
take place on paper that matches  
the original size.  
The original is smaller than 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size.  
When the original is smaller than 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size, the size  
cannot be detected. Use the [PAPER SELECT] key to select the  
desired paper size.  
The original is not a standard size.  
When the original is not a standard size, the size cannot be  
detected. Manually select the closest standard original size, or  
use the [PAPER SELECT] key to select the desired paper size.  
23, 48  
-
A copy, print job, or received fax is being printed.  
Set the correct paper size after printing is finished.  
Operation has temporarily stopped because the tray is  
out of paper or a misfeed occurred.  
Load paper or remove the misfeed, finish the copy job, and then  
set the paper size.  
20, 127  
Paper size for a paper tray cannot  
be set.  
During an interrupt copy job.  
Set the correct paper size after the interrupt copy job is finished.  
35  
Misfeed occurs.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
127  
Paper tray settings are prohibited in the administrator  
settings.  
107  
24  
Change the setting in the administrator settings to permit paper  
tray settings.  
The originals were placed in the wrong order.  
When using the document glass, scan the originals one sheet at  
a time beginning from the first page. When using the RSPF, insert  
the originals with the first page on top and facing up.  
Order of copies is incorrect.  
The memory become full while the originals were  
being scanned.  
When using a function such as pamphlet copy or multi shot copy  
where all original pages are scanned into memory before copying  
begins, scanning will stop and copying will not take place if the  
memory becomes full. The number of pages that can be scanned  
into memory can be increased by installing more memory.  
The job is canceled after the  
originals were being scanned.  
139  
The memory become full while the originals were  
being scanned.  
When the memory becomes full while the originals are being  
scanned, you can select whether you want to continue the job  
and print only those originals that were scanned, or cancel the  
job. If you continue the job, copies will only be made of the  
originals that were scanned, and thus all originals cannot be  
copied at once.  
Not all pages are copied.  
-
Use of the RSPF has been prohibited in the  
administrator settings.  
Enable use of the RSPF in the administrator settings.  
The RSPF cannot be used.  
Lighting fixture flickers.  
107  
5
The same power outlet is used for the lighting fixture  
and the machine.  
Connect the machine to a power outlet which is not used for other  
electric appliances.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Paper feeding problems  
Problem  
Cause and solution  
Page  
The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray  
exceeds the maximum number.  
Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets.  
16  
When using paper fed from the  
bypass tray, the copied image is  
skewed.  
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the  
loaded paper.  
Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper.  
19  
21  
16  
19  
16  
The paper type setting is not correct.  
When using a special paper, be sure to set the correct paper  
type.  
The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray  
exceeds the maximum number.  
Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets.  
Paper from the bypass tray  
misfeeds.  
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the  
loaded paper.  
Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper.  
The paper is outside of the specified size and weight  
range.  
Use copy paper within the specified range.  
Paper is curled or damp.  
Do not use curled or crimped paper. Replace with dry copy paper.  
During periods when the machine is not used for a long time,  
remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place in a  
bag to prevent moisture absorption.  
142  
Paper misfeeds.  
Paper is not loaded properly.  
Make sure the paper is properly loaded.  
18  
127  
18  
-
Pieces of paper remain inside machine.  
Remove all pieces of misfed paper.  
Sheets of paper stick together.  
Fan the paper well before loading it.  
Output does not collect neatly in  
the output tray of the finisher.  
The paper is curled.  
It may help to turn the paper over in the paper tray.  
Stapled output does not collect  
neatly.  
The paper is curled.  
It may help to turn the paper over in the paper tray.  
-
7
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Image quality problems  
Problem  
Cause and solution  
Page  
The image of the original is too light or too dark.  
Select the correct original image type in the exposure setting and  
adjust the copying exposure.  
30  
The copying exposure is set to "AUTO".  
The "EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT" system settings  
(administrator) can be used to adjust the exposure level used for  
"AUTO" exposure. Consult the administrator of the machine.  
110  
30  
Copies are too dark or too light.  
The original type that is most suitable for the original  
has not been selected in the copy exposure setting  
screen.  
Change the original image type selection to "AUTO", or manually  
select the most suitable original image type setting.  
The correct original type has not been selected in the  
copy exposure setting screen.  
Change the original image type setting to "TEXT".  
Text is not clear in a copy.  
30  
23, 24  
31  
The original was placed in the wrong position.  
Place the original in the correct position. When using the  
document glass, place the original against the far left side.  
A suitable ratio for the original size and paper size has  
not been selected.  
Use auto ratio selection to obtain the correct ratio for the copy.  
Part of the copied image is cut off.  
The tray’s paper size setting was not changed when a  
different size of paper was loaded in the tray.  
Be sure to change the tray’s paper size setting when loading a  
different size of paper in the tray.  
20  
48  
An AB paper size is being used.  
When using copy paper that is an AB size, set the original size  
manually.  
The original is not placed face up in the RSPF or face  
down on the document glass.  
Place the original face up in the RSPF or face down on the  
document glass.  
Blank copies.  
23, 24  
16  
The paper is outside of the specified size and weight  
range.  
Use copy paper within the specified range.  
The paper type setting is not correct.  
Set the correct paper type. To set the paper type for a tray, see  
"CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE  
SETTINGS".  
Paper is wrinkled or the copied  
image comes off when the paper  
surface is rubbed.  
20, 21  
Paper is curled or damp.  
Do not use curled or wrinkled paper. Replace with dry copy  
paper. During periods when the machine is not used for a long  
time, remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place  
in a bag to prevent moisture absorption.  
142  
137  
The document glass or the underside of the RSPF is  
dirty.  
Clean regularly.  
Copies are smudged or dirty.  
The original is smudged or blotchy.  
Use a clean original.  
-
The scanner glass for the RSPF is dirty.  
Clean the long, narrow scanning glass.  
White or black lines appear copies.  
137  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PROBLEMS WHEN THE NETWORK  
SCANNER FUNCTION IS USED  
If a problem or question arises, try to solve the situation using the following information before contacting your  
authorized SHARP dealer.  
Problem  
Cause and solution  
Page  
The original is loaded upside down.  
If you are using the document glass, the original must be placed  
face down. If you are using the RSPF, the original must be  
inserted face up.  
The image cannot be scanned.  
72  
A slight amount of moiré sometimes appears when  
printed matter is scanned.  
Moiré can in some cases be reduced by changing the scanning  
resolution.  
A moiré (stripe pattern) appears on  
the scanned image.  
80  
If you are using the document glass, also try shifting the position  
and/or angle of the original on the document glass.  
The document glass or the underside of the RSPF (or  
document cover) is dirty.  
To clean the document glass and the underside of the document  
cover, see operation manual for copier.  
The scanned image is fuzzy or has  
smudges.  
The set original scanning size is smaller than the actual  
original size.  
Set the actual original size.  
If you intentionally selected a size setting smaller than the actual  
original size, take into consideration the part of the original that  
you wish to scan when placing the original. For example, if the  
actual size is 8-1/2" x 11" and you selected 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" for the  
size setting, place the original so that the part that you wish to  
scan is within the 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" area indicated by the guides on  
the far left side of the document glass.  
The scanned image is clipped.  
78  
78  
The original was not placed in the correct orientation.  
Place the original in the correct orientation. (See operation  
manual for copier)  
The scanned image is upside down  
or on its side.  
To rotate the image 90 degrees, touch the [ORIGINAL] key in the  
initial screen and then touch the "ROTATE THE IMAGE 90  
DEGREES" checkbox to make a checkmark appear.  
The viewer program used by the recipient does not  
support the format of the received image data.  
Try selecting a different file type (TIFF or PDF) and/or a different  
compression format (NONE, MH (G3), MMR (G4)) when sending  
the image data.  
7
The received image data cannot be  
opened.  
81  
Otherwise, have the recipient use Sharpdesk or a viewer  
program that supports the above combinations of file types and  
compression formats.  
The first file may still remain in the cache of the file server  
client. Disable use of the cache in the client software.  
When the same file name is used for  
two successive Scan to FTP  
transmissions, the second file is not  
sent.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Problem  
Cause and solution  
Page  
An incorrect destination was selected.  
Otherwise, there is a mistake in the information stored  
for the destination (e-mail address or FTP server  
information).  
Select the correct destination and make sure the correct  
information is stored for the destination.  
The recipient does not receive  
transmitted data.  
62 - 65  
* If delivery by e-mail (Scan to E-mail) is unsuccessful, an  
error message such as "Undelivered Message" may be  
sent to the designated administrator's e-mail address.  
This information may help you determine the cause of  
the problem.  
Check the Web page to see if a limit has been set for the size  
of image files sent using Scan to E-mail (the factory default  
setting is "Unlimited").  
58  
A limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB. Consult the  
administrator of the Web page to select a suitable limit.  
The amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail  
transmission is sometimes limited by the administrator of the  
mail server. Even if the amount of data sent is within the limit  
setting explained above, if it exceeds the limit set by the  
administrator of the mail server, the data will not be delivered  
to the recipient.  
Decrease the amount of data sent in the e-mail transmission  
(reduce the number of pages scanned). (Ask your mail server  
administrator what the data limit is for one e-mail transmission.)  
The recipient does not receive data  
sent by e-mail (Scan to E-mail).  
When there is a large amount of image information, the data  
file is also large and transmission takes a long time.  
Transmission takes a long time.  
In order to select image quality and data compression settings that are suited to the purpose  
of transmission and create image data that is well-balanced in terms of image quality and file  
size, pay attention to the following points:  
Caution  
Image quality modes (TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO, PHOTO)  
The factory default setting is "TEXT/PHOTO". If the original does not contain photographs, illustrations, or  
other halftone images, "TEXT" mode will give you the most workable scanned image. "TEXT/PHOTO" should  
only be selected when the original includes a photograph and you wish to give priority to the quality of the  
photograph. (There is no advantage to scanning a text-only original in "TEXT/PHOTO" or "PHOTO" mode.)  
"PHOTO" mode should only be used to scan a photograph or illustration. Note that this will produce a larger file  
size than the other modes.  
Resolution  
The factory default setting is "300 dpi". This is suitable for originals with mixed text and  
illustrations/photographs; however, it produces a slightly larger file size. For normal text originals, a resolution  
setting of 200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently readable. (200 dpi is equivalent to the "Fine" resolution  
setting of fax machines.)  
The 600 dpi setting should only be used in cases where high-clarity image reproduction is required, such as an  
original that includes photographs or illustrations. Note that a high-resolution setting will result in a larger file  
size and transmission may not be successful if there is insufficient disk capacity in the server to which the  
image is sent (or if the administrator of the server has restricted the file size). If transmission is not successful,  
you can try such measures as reducing the number of scanned pages in the file or reducing the scan size  
setting for the original.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
DISPLAY MESSAGES  
If one of the following messages appears in the display, promptly take action as instructed by the message.  
Message  
Solution  
Page  
THE DOCUMENT FEEDER IS  
DISABLED.  
Use of the RSPF has been disabled in the administrator settings.  
Use the document glass.  
YOUR FILENAME IS WRONG.  
The characters ¥/;:*?"<> cannot be used in a file name. Select a  
name that does not use those characters.  
NO MATCHING ADDRESS  
FOUND.  
PRESS [OK] THEN [SEARCH  
AGAIN].  
There are no addresses in the LDAP server that match your search  
text. Select a different server or change the search text.  
75  
UNABLE TO ACCESS THE  
SERVER.  
CHECK SERVER ADDRESS ON  
DEVICE WEB PAGE.  
The server settings are not configured correctly. Check the server  
settings.  
59  
THE ADDRESS LIMIT HAS  
BEEN REACHED.  
NO MORE ADDRESSES CAN BE 100 destinations.  
ENTERED.  
The maximum number of destinations that can be selected for a  
single Scan to E-mail transmission is 100. Do not select more than  
THE MEMORY BECOMES FULL. The memory became full while scanning the originals. If you wish to  
SCANNED DATA IS  
TRANSMITTED.  
send just the originals that were scanned, touch the [SEND] key. If  
you wish to cancel the entire transmission, touch the [CANCEL]  
key.  
NO RESPONSE FROM SERVER. The scanned image was not sent because the server was busy or  
COMMUNICATION  
TERMINATED DUE TO  
TIMEOUT.  
there was too much traffic. Wait briefly and then try again.  
NETWORK ERROR  
The scanned image was not sent because the directory of the  
THE DIRECTORY NAME OF FTP destination FTP server was not correct. Make sure that the correct  
63  
SERVER IS INVALID.  
FTP server information is configured in the Web page.  
SERVER ACCESS DENIED.  
CHECK ACCOUNT  
INFORMATION ON DEVICE WEB settings or FTP server settings in the Web page are correct.  
The scanned image was not sent because a connection to the  
server could not be established. Make sure that the SMTP server  
59  
PAGE.  
Make sure that your login name and password are correct.  
NETWORK ERROR. (  
CONSULT YOUR  
ADMINISTRATOR OR SYSTEM  
ADMIN. FOR SPECIFIC  
INFORMATION.  
)
Turn off the power and turn it back on. Consult with your network  
administrator to make sure that no problems exist on the network or  
in the server. If the error is not cleared after turning the power off  
and on, write down the 2-digit main code and 2-digit sub-code, turn  
off the power, and contact your dealer.  
7
Error codes  
If a transmission error occurs when you send a scanned image, a message informing you of the error and an error  
code will appear in the touch panel on the machine.  
Error Code Table  
Error Code  
CE-01  
Description of the Error  
An interface hardware error has occurred.  
CE-03  
The server was down during the scanning of the original.  
An error other than the above has occurred.  
CE-00  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED  
If a Scan to E-mail is not successfully transmitted, an e-mail informing you of this fact is sent to the sender selected  
at the time of transmission. If this happens, read the e-mail and determine the cause of the error, and then repeat  
the transmission.  
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO E-MAIL  
Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large.  
Your mail server's system administrator may have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail  
transmission. If this limit is exceeded, the e-mail will not be delivered to the recipient. Even if there is no limit and  
your e-mail is successfully delivered, a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden  
on the recipient's network, depending on the recipient's network (Internet) connection environment.  
If large image data files are repeatedly sent, the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other,  
unrelated data transmissions and in some cases, may even cause the mail server or network to go down.  
The images on the following page will produce the following file sizes when scanned as 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size  
originals:  
File size of text original A when scanned  
in "TEXT" mode.  
File size of photo original B when  
scanned in "TEXT/PHOTO" mode.  
Resolution  
300dpi  
600dpi  
Approx. 50 KB  
Approx. 90 KB  
Approx. 1400 KB  
Approx. 5000 KB  
* If multiple images are scanned, the file size will be approximately (Size of each image as indicated above) x  
(Number of images scanned).  
Although the actual limitation depends on your network environment, a general guideline for the maximum file size  
for Scan to E-mail is 2000 KB. In cases where you need to send multiple documents, try such measures as lowering  
the resolution mode.  
Original image samples  
The original images shown below are samples to help you understand the above explanations. Note that these  
images are smaller than the actual originals (the actual originals are 8-1/2" x 11" size).  
Text original A  
Photo original B  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MISFEED REMOVAL  
When a misfeed occurs during copying, the message "MISFEED HAS OCCURRED." will appear in the touch panel  
and printing will stop.  
If the misfed paper tears during removal, remove the torn pieces. Take care not to touch the photoconductive  
drum while removing the pieces. Nicks and scratches on the drum will cause dirty copies.  
First, locate the misfeed  
1
Misfeed in the RSPF (p.128)  
Misfeed in the finisher (p.133)  
Misfeed in the right tray (p.132)  
Misfeed in the machine (p.129)  
Misfeed in the bypass tray (p.129)  
Misfeed in the upper paper tray (p.131)  
Misfeed in the lower paper tray (p.132)  
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.  
2
1
3
2  
3  
4  
5  
6  
7  
4
5
6
7
INFORMATION  
If the fax option is installed, all received faxes are stored in memory. The faxes are automatically printed after the  
misfeed is removed.  
Note  
MISFEED REMOVAL GUIDANCE  
Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a  
misfeed has occurred.  
INFORMATION  
7
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
MISFEED IN THE RSPF  
Section C  
Remove the misfed original.  
1
Carefully remove the  
misfed original from the  
exit area.  
Check sections A, B, and  
C in the illustration at left  
A
and remove the misfed  
original.  
B
C
If the misfed original cannot be easily removed from  
the exit area, open the moveable part of the document  
feeder tray and remove the reversing tray, and then  
remove the original.  
Section A  
Open the document  
feeder cover and  
Document feeder cover  
Moveable  
part  
Reversing tray  
carefully remove the  
misfed original from the  
document feeder tray.  
Close the document  
feeder cover.  
Section B  
Open the RSPF and  
rotate the release roller in  
the direction of the arrow  
to feed the original out.  
Close the RSPF and then  
carefully remove the  
Roller  
After removing a misfed original from the  
exit area, be sure to attach the reversing tray  
securely to the exit area (When the RSPF is  
installed.).  
original.  
Note  
If the misfed original  
cannot be removed,  
open the document  
transport cover (below),  
and rotate the release  
roller again.  
Open and close the RSPF to clear the  
misfeed message from the touch  
panel.  
2
The message can also  
be cleared by opening  
and closing the  
document feeder cover  
or the document  
If a small original (5-1/2" x 8-1/2", etc.) is misfed, or if  
an original misfeed occurs in the reversing tray of the  
RSPF, lift the document transport cover knob, open the  
document transport cover, and remove the original.  
transport cover.  
Document  
transport cover  
After the misfeed is removed and the misfeed  
message is cleared, a message will appear indicating  
the number of originals that must be reinserted in the  
RSPF.  
Document transport  
cover knob  
Reinsert the originals that still must  
3
be scanned (Including the original that  
was being scanned when the misfeed  
occurred.), and press the [START]  
key( ).  
Copying of the remaining originals will resume.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY  
Carefully pull the misfed paper out.  
Open and close the side cover.  
1
2
Make sure that the  
misfeed message is  
cleared.  
The message can also  
be cleared by opening  
and closing the front  
cover.  
If the message is not  
cleared, see "A. Misfeed  
in the paper feed area".  
MISFEED IN THE MACHINE  
Determine the location of the misfeed and remove it appropriately as indicated below.  
If paper is misfed, go to "B:  
Misfeed in the fusing area"  
(p.130).  
If paper is misfed here, go to "A.  
Misfeed in the paper feed area"  
(below).  
A. Misfeed in the paper feed area  
Open the bypass tray and the side  
cover.  
Carefully remove the misfed paper.  
Turn the roller rotating knob in the  
direction of the arrow to assist in  
removing it.  
1
3
7
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Roller rotating knob  
Press gently on both sides of the front  
cover and pull it open.  
2
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch  
the fusing unit when removing  
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a  
burn or injury.  
Warning  
Caution  
Do not touch the photoconductive drum  
(green portion) when removing the misfed  
paper. Doing so may damage the drum and  
cause smudges on copies.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Close the front cover and side cover.  
4
Make sure that the  
misfeed message is  
cleared.  
B: Misfeed in the fusing area  
Open the bypass tray and the side  
cover.  
If you were unable to remove the  
misfeed in step 4, press down on the  
fusing unit paper guide knob to open  
the paper guide, and carefully remove  
the misfed paper.  
1
5
Press and pull it open gently on both  
sides of the front cover.  
2
• Do not touch the photoconductive drum  
Caution  
(green portion) when removing the misfed  
paper. Doing so may damage the drum  
and cause smudges on copies.  
Take care not to let unfixed toner on the  
misfed paper soil your hands or clothes.  
Turn the roller rotating knob in the  
direction of the arrow.  
3
Close the fusing unit paper guide and  
press down on the fusing unit release  
levers.  
6
7
Roller rotating knob  
Close the front cover and side cover.  
Make sure that the  
misfeed message is  
cleared.  
Lift the fusing unit release levers and  
4
carefully remove the misfed paper.  
Fusing unit release levers  
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch  
the fusing unit when removing  
Warning  
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a  
burn or injury.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
MISFEED IN THE CENTER TRAY  
Remove the paper by pulling it into the center tray.  
MISFEED IN THE UPPER PAPER TRAY  
Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine before pulling the tray out. (p.129)  
Lift and pull out the upper paper tray  
and then remove the misfed paper.  
1
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Replace the upper paper tray.  
2
Push the upper paper  
tray in completely.  
Open and close the side cover.  
3
7
Make sure that the  
misfeed message is  
cleared.  
The message can also  
be cleared by opening  
and closing the front  
cover.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
MISFEED IN THE LOWER PAPER TRAY  
Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine before pulling the tray out. (p.129)  
Use the following procedure to remove misfeeds that occur in the 500-sheet paper feed unit or 2 x 500-sheet paper  
feed unit.  
Open the lower side cover.  
If the misfed paper is not visible in  
step 2, lift and pull out the lower paper  
tray and remove the misfed paper.  
1
3
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
2
Replace the lower paper tray.  
Push the lower paper tray in completely.  
Close the lower side cover.  
4
5
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Make sure that the  
misfeed message is  
cleared.  
MISFEED IN THE RIGHT TRAY  
(when a right tray (MX-TE10) is installed)  
Gently open the right tray cover.  
Close the right tray cover.  
1
3
Make sure that the misfeed message is cleared.  
Remove the misfed paper.  
2
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
MISFEED IN THE UPPER EXIT AREA  
(
when a job separator tray kit or finisher (MX-FN13) is installed)  
If a job separator tray kit or a finisher is installed, a misfeed may occur in the upper exit area.  
Open the upper right side cover.  
Gently pull the misfed paper out.  
1
2
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Close the upper right side cover.  
3
Make sure that the misfeed message is cleared.  
MISFEED IN AN OUTPUT TRAY  
(when a finisher (MX-FN13) is installed)  
Open the front cover.  
Slide the finisher back to the right.  
1
4
While pressing the lever over to the  
left, slide the finisher to the left until it  
stops.  
Close the cover.  
2
5
Gently slide the finisher  
until it stops.  
7
Turn roller rotating knob in the  
direction of the arrow to remove the  
misfed paper.  
3
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
To check how much toner remains in the toner cartridge (p.137), hold down the [COPY] key. The amount of toner  
remaining will appear in the display. When less than 25% of the toner remains, obtain a new toner cartridge as soon  
as possible. When "PREPARE A NEW ONE." appears in the display, the toner cartridge must be prepared. When  
"TONER SUPPLY IS LOW." appears in the display, be sure to have a new cartridge on hand for replacement at any  
time as little toner remains. When "CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE." appears in the touch panel, the toner  
cartridge must be replaced. Follow these steps to replace the cartridge.  
• Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.  
• Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.  
Caution  
Note  
When running long copy jobs or copying originals with many areas of solid black, "TONER REPLENISHMENT IN  
PROGRESS." may appear in the touch panel and copying may stop even though the cartridge still has toner.  
When this occurs, the toner is being replenished. Replenishment will last about two minutes. When toner  
replenishment finishes, copying resumes.  
Press gently on both sides of the front  
cover and pull it open.  
While holding down the lock release  
lever, insert along guides inside the  
machine until the cartridge locks into  
place.  
1
2
4
5
Pull the toner cartridge out while  
pressing the lock release lever.  
When pulling out the  
toner cartridge, place  
your other hand on the  
green part of the  
cartridge.  
If dirt or dust adheres to the toner cartridge,  
remove it before installing the cartridge.  
Note  
Close the front cover.  
Toner cartridge  
lock release lever  
• After removing the toner cartridge, do not  
shake it or tap it. Doing so may cause  
toner to leak from the cartridge.  
Note  
• Dispose of the old toner cartridge in  
accordance with local regulations.  
Remove the new toner cartridge from  
the bag. Grasp both ends of the  
cartridge and shake it horizontally  
about 4 or 5 times.  
3
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT  
(when the finisher (MX-FN13) is installed)  
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure  
below to replace the staple cartridge.  
Replacing the staple cartridge  
Open the cover.  
Insert a new staple cartridge into the  
staple case as shown.  
1
2
5
Push the staple cartridge  
in until it clicks into place.  
While pressing the lever over to the  
left, slide the finisher to the left until it  
stops.  
Replace the staple case.  
6
7
8
Push the staple case in  
until it clicks into place.  
Gently slide the finisher  
until it stops.  
Slide the finisher back to the right.  
Lower the staple case release lever  
and remove the staple case.  
3
4
Gently slide the finisher  
back to the right until it  
locks into its original  
position.  
Pull the staple case out  
to the right.  
Close the cover.  
7
Remove the empty staple cartridge  
from the staple case.  
Gently slide the finisher  
back to the right until it  
locks into its original  
position.  
Note  
Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Removing staple jams  
Follow the steps below to remove a staple jam.  
Open the cover.  
Lower the lever at the front end of the  
staple case.  
1
5
6
7
8
While pressing the lever over to the  
left, slide the finisher to the left until it  
stops.  
Replace the staple case.  
2
Push the staple case in  
until it clicks into place.  
Gently slide the finisher  
until it stops.  
Slide the finisher back to the right.  
Lower the staple case release lever  
and remove the staple case.  
3
Gently slide the finisher  
back to the right until it  
locks into its original  
position.  
Pull the staple case out  
to the right.  
Close the cover.  
Raise the lever at the front end of the  
staple case and remove the jammed  
staple.  
4
Gently slide the finisher  
back to the right until it  
locks into its original  
position.  
Remove the leading  
staple if it is bent. If bent  
staples remain, a staple  
jam will occur again.  
Take care that a bent staple does not hurt  
you.  
Caution  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY  
AND TOTAL COUNT  
The approximate quantity of toner remaining and the total count can be displayed as explained below.  
The total count shows the combined output total of the copy, fax, and printer functions.  
Checking the total count and toner quantity  
Hold down the [COPY] key. The total count and toner quantity appear while the key is held down.  
TOTAL COUNT : 0,123,456  
TONER QUANTITY : 100-75%  
SPECIAL MODES  
COPY  
2-SIDED COPY  
ON LINE  
PRINT  
8½x11  
8½x14  
DATA  
OUTPUT  
DATA  
SCAN  
• Each 11" x 17" (A3) page is counted as two pages. Two-sided 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size output is counted as two  
sheets  
Note  
• The amount of toner consumed will vary depending on conditions of usage and the type of originals copied.  
The toner quantity display should only be used as an approximate guide.  
CLEANING THE MACHINE  
DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF  
If the document glass, RSPF, or scanning glass for originals fed from the RSPF (the long narrow glass surface on  
the right side of the document glass) become dirty, the dirt may appear on copies. Always keep these parts clean.  
Stains or dirt on the document glass/RSPF will also be copied. Wipe the document glass, the RSPF and the  
scanning window on the document glass with a soft, clean cloth.  
If necessary, dampen the cloth with water. Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents.  
7
Do not spray flammable cleaner gas. Gas from the spray may come in contact with the internal  
electrical components or high-temperature parts of the fusing unit, creating a risk of fire or  
electrical shock.  
Warning  
Surface of document glass  
Underside of RSPF  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE  
Cleaning the scanning glass for RSPF  
If white or black lines appear in copies made with using the RSPF, use the provided  
glass cleaner to clean the scanning glass for RSPF.  
Example of dirty print image  
White lines  
Black lines  
Open the RSPF and take out the glass  
cleaner.  
Return the glass cleaner to its original  
position.  
1
2
3
Clean the scanning glass with the  
glass cleaner.  
Scanning glass for RSPF  
Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the area on the operation  
panel with a mirror-like finish (shown at right). If you use a stiff cloth or  
rub hard, the surface may be damaged.  
Note  
The area with a mirror-like finish is  
the area that is  
.
THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER  
If misfeeds occur frequently when feeding envelopes or other thick paper from the bypass tray, wipe the paper feed  
roller at the feed slot of the bypass tray with a soft, clean cloth moistened with alcohol or water.  
Bypass tray paper feed roller  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES  
8
Optional equipments and supplies are explained in this chapter. To purchase optional equipment and supplies  
contact your SHARP service center.  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES  
FINISHER (MX-FN13) See page 140.  
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (MX-DE10) See page 141.  
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (MX-DE11) See page 141.  
HIGH STAND (MX-DS11)  
LOW STAND (MX-DS12)  
RIGHT TRAY (MX-TE10)  
When a finisher (MX-FN13) is installed, an output tray can be added on the right side.  
JOB SEPARATOR TRAY KIT (MX-TR11)  
This enables separation of output locations by mode (copy, printer, etc.).  
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (MX-PB12)  
This allows the machine to be used as a network printer.  
1
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE KIT (MX-AMX1)*  
The application integration module can be used in combination with the network scanner function to attach  
metadata to a scanned image file before it is transmitted.  
MACRO FONT FLASH ROM KIT (AR-PF2)  
Fonts and forms can be downloaded and stored.  
2
PS3 EXPANSION KIT (MX-PB12)*  
This kit offers PostScript 3 compatibility.  
2
BARCODE FONT KIT (AR-PF1)*  
This font set adds barcode printing capability.  
3
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT (MX-NSX1)*  
This allows the machine to be used as a network scanner.  
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT (AR-FX7)  
This allows the machine can be used as a facsimile machine.  
8MB FAX MEMORY (AR-MM9)  
Image memory can be expanded by installing the optional fax expansion memory.  
256MB EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD (AR-SM5)  
512MB EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD (AR-SM6)  
Additional memory can be installed in the machine. There are two DIMM slots in this machine, and the memory  
can be expanded to a maximum of 1056 MB.  
1
* Requires installation of the NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT (MX-NSX1).  
2
* Requires installation of the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (MX-PB12).  
3
* Requires installation of the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (MX-PB12), and 128MB or more of memory must be  
extended.  
A commercial 64/128/256/512MB (the 168 pin SDRAM DIMM) memory module can be used to expand memory  
in this unit. For more information, consult your SHARP service center.  
Note  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES  
FINISHER (MX-FN13)  
The finisher is equipped with the offset function, which offsets each set of output from the previous set.  
In addition, each set of sorted output can be stapled.  
Part names  
The following parts can be accessed when the finisher is open.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(1) Offset tray  
(3) Front cover  
Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.  
The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for large output  
(11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R,  
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, A3, A4R, B4 sizes).  
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed, replace  
staples, remove a staple jam, or remove the punch  
scrap case.  
(4) Staple case  
(2) Lever  
This holds the staple cartridge. Pull the case out to  
replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam.  
Use this to move the finisher in order to remove a  
paper misfeed, replace staples, or remove a staple  
jam.  
(5) Staple case release lever  
Use this to remove the staple case.  
Specifications  
MX-FN13  
Tray capacity  
Paper size  
Offset  
500 sheets (250 sheets for sizes larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R))  
Size  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" (A6R to A3)  
2
2
Weight  
15 lbs. to 54 lbs. (56 g/m to 200 g/m )  
1-3/16" (30 mm) (Offset Tray)  
Paper sizes that can be 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,  
stapled  
B5R)  
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R:  
2
50 sheets (21 lbs. (80 g/m ))  
Stapling capacity  
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", A3, B4:  
2
30 sheets (21 lbs. (80 g/m ))  
Power supply  
Weight  
Drawn from the machine  
Approx. 31.8 lbs. (14.4 kg)  
18-37/64" (W) x 18-5/32" (D) x 7-27/32" (H) (472 mm (W) x 461 mm (D) x 199 mm (H))  
(Normal)  
Dimensions  
24-3/8" (W) x 18-5/32" (D) x 7-27/32" (H) (619 mm (W) x 461 mm (D) x 199 mm (H))  
(Tray extended)  
• As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification  
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are  
nominal values of production units and there may be some deviations from these values in individual units.  
• Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the offset tray may move up and  
down.  
Note  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES  
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT/  
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT  
These paper feed units provide the convenience of increased paper capacity for the machine and a greater choice of  
paper sizes readily available for copying.  
The MX-DE10 contains one 500-sheet paper tray and the MX-DE11 contains two 500-sheet paper trays.  
Part names  
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT  
2x500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT  
(MX-DE10)  
(MX-DE11)  
Side cover  
Side cover  
Tray  
Tray  
Specifications  
MX-DE10  
MX-DE11  
Size  
8-1/2" x 11" to 11" x 17" (B5 to A3)  
Paper  
2
2
Weight  
15 lbs. to 28 lbs. (56 g/m to 105 g/m )  
Upper tray 500 sheets  
500 sheets  
Paper  
capacity  
Lower tray  
500 sheets  
Weight  
Approx. 15.5 lbs. (7.0 kg)  
Approx. 29.2 lbs. (13.2 kg)  
23-15/32" (W) x 19-39/64" (D) x 4-1/64" (H)  
(596 mm (W) x 498 mm (D) x 102 mm (H))  
23-15/32" (W) x 19-39/64" (D) x 7-61/64" (H)  
(596 mm (W) x 498 mm(D) x 202 mm(H))  
Dimensions  
Power supply  
Drawn from the machine  
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification  
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are  
nominal values of production units and there may be some deviations from these values in individual units.  
Note  
8
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES  
Standard supplies for this product that are to be replaced by the user are paper and the toner cartridge.  
For best copying results, be sure to use only SHARP Genuine Supplies which are designed, engineered  
and tested to maximize the life and performance of SHARP copiers. Look for the Genuine Supplies label  
on the toner package.  
GENUINE SUPPLIES  
PROPER STORAGE  
Store the supplies in a location that is:  
• clean and dry,  
• at a stable temperature,  
• not exposed to direct sunlight.  
Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.  
Paper stored out of the wrapper or in packages  
standing on end may curl or get damp, resulting in  
paper misfeeds.  
Supply and Consumables  
The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination  
of production. Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary  
use of the product - whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered as  
spare parts. Consumables too, are available for 7 years following the termination of production.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
APPENDIX  
9
SPECIFICATIONS  
Model  
MX-M260  
MX-M310  
Type  
Digital Multifunction System, Desktop  
OPC drum  
Photoconductive type  
Document glass type  
Copy system  
Originals  
Fixed  
Dry, electrostatic transfer  
Sheets, bound documents  
Max. 11" x 17" (A3)  
Originals size  
Max. 11" x 17" (A3)  
Min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A6)  
Image loss: Max. 5/32" (4 mm) (leading and trailing edges)  
Max. 11/64" (6 mm) (along other edges in total)  
Copy size  
14 copies/min. 11" x 17"  
17 copies/min. 11" x 17"  
Copying speed  
(one-sided copying at  
100% copy ratio)  
16 copies/min. 8-1/2" x 14"  
18 copies/min. 8-1/2" x 11"R  
26 copies/min. 8-1/2" x 11"  
26 copies/min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"  
20 copies/min. 8-1/2" x 14"  
24 copies/min. 8-1/2" x 11"R  
31 copies/min. 8-1/2" x 11"  
31 copies/min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"  
Continuous copy  
Max. 999 copies; subtractive counter  
Approx. 4.8 sec.  
(When 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper is fed (When 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper is fed  
Approx. 4.5 sec.  
1
First-copy time*  
horizontally from tray1)  
horizontally from tray1)  
2
Warm-up time*  
Approx. 23 sec.  
Approx. 25 sec.  
Variable: 25% to 400%, in 1% increments (total 376 steps)  
Fixed preset: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200%, 400%  
Copy ratio  
Document glass: Moving optical source, slit exposure (stationary platen) with  
automatic exposure function  
Exposure system  
RSPF:  
Moving original  
Paper feed  
Two automatic feeding paper trays (500 sheets x 2) + bypass tray (100 sheets)  
Fusing system  
Developer system  
Light source  
Resolution  
Heat rollers  
Magnetic brush development  
Xenon lamp  
Scan: 400 x 600 dpi Output: 600 x 600 dpi  
Scanning: 256 levels  
Printing: Equivalent to 256 levels  
Gradation  
Power supply  
AC 120V 10%, 60 Hz, 12A  
Power consumption  
Overall dimensions  
Weight  
Max. 1.45 kW  
42-3/4" (W) x 24-23/32" (D) (1086 mm (W) x 628 mm (D))  
Approx. 113.6 lbs. (51.5 kg) (Not includes toner cartridge)  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
24-17/32" (W) x 24-23/32" (D) x 31-1/64" (H)  
(623 mm (W) x 628 mm (D) x 788 mm (H))  
Dimensions  
Operating conditions  
Temperature: 59°F to 86°F (15°C to 30°C), Humidity: 20% to 85%  
Sound Power Level LwA(1B=10dB)  
Copying: 6.3[B] (MX-M260)  
Copying: 6.3[B] (MX-M310)  
Standby: 3.1[B] (MX-M260, MX-M310)  
Sound Pressure Level LpA (bystander positions)  
Copying: 50[dB(A)] (MX-M260)  
Copying: 49[dB(A)] (MX-M310)  
Noise level  
Standby: 16[dB(A)] (MX-M260, MX-M310)  
Sound Pressure Level LpA (operator position)  
Copying: 49[dB(A)] (MX-M260)  
Copying: 49[dB(A)] (MX-M310)  
Standby: 17[dB(A)] (MX-M260)  
Standby: 17[dB(A)] (MX-M310)  
Noise emission measurement in accordance with ISO 7779.  
Emission concentration  
(measured according to  
RAL-UZ62: Editon Jan.  
2002)  
3
Ozone: 0.02 mg/m or less  
Dust:  
3
0.075 mg/m or less  
3
Styrene: 0.07 mg/m or less  
*1 First copy time is measured with original on the document glass in full ready condition with fuser at operating temperature and  
mirror motor at operating speed, actual time may vary based on environment conditions.  
*2 The warm-up time may vary depending on the power-supply voltage, ambient temperature, and other operating conditions.  
Reversing single pass feeder (RSPF)  
2
2
2
2
9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35 g/m to 128 g/m ) (14 lbs. to 28 lbs. (52 g/m to 105 g/m ) for  
Weight  
two-sided original)  
Acceptable  
original  
Size  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17"  
Capacity  
Up to 100 sheets* (Thickness 33/64" (13 mm) and below)  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"  
(A4, A3)  
Detectable original sizes  
Weight  
16.4 lbs. (7.4 kg)  
23-1/16" (W) x 19-31/64" (D) x 7-23/64" (H)  
(586 mm (W) x 495 mm (D) x 187 mm (H))  
Dimensions  
2
* When paper weight is 24 lbs. (90 g/m ).  
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification  
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are  
nominal values of production units. There may be some deviations from these values in individual units.  
Note  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS FOR NETWORK  
SCANNER  
Maximum original size  
Optical resolution  
Output resolution  
Output modes  
11" x 17" or A3  
400dpi  
200, 300, 600dpi  
1bit/pixel  
Halftone processing  
File format  
Error dispersion (200/300/600dpi)  
File type: TIFF/PDF  
Compression mode: MH (G3)/MMR (G4)/NONE  
File creation method  
Two-sided originals  
Scan destinations  
Web browser  
One file for all pages/One file per each 1 to 6 pages  
Possible (when an RSPF is installed)  
Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to E-mail  
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later (Windows), Netscape Navigator 7.0  
or later, Safari 1.2 or later (Macintosh)  
Management system  
Network protocol  
Uses built-in Web server  
TCP/IP, SMTP, LDAP, FTP  
Mail servers supporting SMTP  
10Base-T/100Base-TX  
200 maximum  
Supported mail system  
LAN connectivity  
Number of destinations  
Number of destinations for Scan To E-mail  
broadcast transmission  
100 maximum*  
* Multiple e-mail addresses (up to 100) can be stored as a group. Note that this may reduce the maximum number  
of destinations (normally 200) that can be stored.  
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.  
Scanning margins  
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)  
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)  
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)  
When scanning an original, the area indicated in the  
following diagram cannot be scanned.  
Area that can  
be scanned  
Scan size  
setting  
Scanning  
margins  
Approx. 0.1" (2.5mm)  
Scan size  
setting  
9
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 1/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNo.F-01791  
1.PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION  
Product Name  
:MX-312NT / MX-312GT / MX-312AT / MX-312BT / MX-312FT / MX-312JT  
MX-313JT / MX-314JTK( Black Toner )  
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation  
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan  
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.  
Area  
(Country)  
U.S.A.  
(Name and Telephone Number)  
Sharp Electronics Corporation  
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ  
Telephone number for information  
Emergency telephone number  
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.  
Telephone number for information  
Emergency telephone number  
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.  
: 1-800-237-4277  
North  
: 1-800-255-3924  
America  
Canada  
Australia  
Germany  
: 905-890-2100  
: 1-800-255-3924  
Oceania  
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH  
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg  
Telephone number to access MSDS  
For more information  
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics France S.A.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics GMBH  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB  
: 1300-13-50-22  
: 040-2376-2185  
: 040-2376-2613  
United  
Kingdom  
France  
: 08705-274-277  
: 01-49-90-34-00  
: 01-727-19-0  
: 02895951  
Austria  
Italy  
Europe  
Spain  
: 93-581-97-00  
: 30-6359500  
: 08-634-36-00  
: 01-846-6111  
Netherlands  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
U.A.E.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics(Schweiz)AG  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Middle East FZE  
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai  
Telephone number for information  
Middle  
East  
: 04-815311  
2.COMPOSITION / INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS  
Substance[ ]  
Ingredient  
Preparation[X]  
CAS No.  
Proportion  
OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK-TWA  
NOHSC-TWA  
Styrene-Acrylate  
copolymer  
Carbon black  
Polyethylene  
Polypropylene  
Charge control agent Confidential  
Amorphous silica  
Iron Oxide  
Confidential  
80-90%  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
1333-86-4  
Confidential  
Confidential  
5-10%  
1-5%  
1-5%  
0.1-1%  
0.1-1%  
1-5%  
3.5mg/m3  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
80 mg/m3  
Not listed  
3.5mg/m3  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
2mg/m3  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
3mg/m3  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
68611-44-9  
1309-38-2  
Not listed  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 2/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNo.F-01791  
3.HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION  
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products  
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests  
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do not  
indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.  
Environmental Effects : Not toxic to aquatic organisms  
[Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
Specific Hazards  
: Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)  
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe) : Not classified as dangerous  
4.FIRST-AID MEASURES  
Route(s) of Entry : Inhalation?  
Skin?  
No  
Ingestion?  
Possible but very unusual.  
Yes  
Inhalation  
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.  
Skin Contact : Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.  
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.  
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.  
Ingestion  
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water. If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult  
medical personnel.  
5.FIRE-FIGHTING MEASURES  
Extinguishing Media  
: Water, CO2, foam and dry chemicals  
Special Fire Fighting Procedures : None  
Fire and Explosion Hazards : Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an explosive  
mixture.  
6.ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES  
Personal Precautions  
Environmental Precautions  
Methods for Cleaning Up  
: None  
: None  
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large amount is  
released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of creating a  
dust explosion.  
7.HANDLING AND STORAGE  
Handling  
Technical Measures  
Precautions  
: None  
: None  
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long  
term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.  
Storage  
Technical Measures  
Storage Conditions  
: None  
: Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.  
Keep out of the reach of children.  
Incompatible Products : None  
8.EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION  
Engineering Measures  
Ventilation  
: Not required under intended use.  
Exposure Limit Values  
OSHA-PEL(USA)  
ACGIH-TLV(USA)  
: 15mg/m3 (Total Dust), 5mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)  
: 10mg/m3 (Total Dust), 3mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 3/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNo.F-01791  
Personal Protective Equipment  
Respiratory Protection  
Hand Protection  
Eye Protection  
Skin Protection  
: Not required under intended use.  
: Not required under intended use.  
: Not required under intended use.  
: Not required under intended use.  
Other Protective Equipment  
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large  
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.  
9.PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES  
Appearance  
Physical State : Solid  
Ph  
Boiling / Melting Point  
Softening Point(°C)  
Flash Point(°C)  
lgnition Point(°C )  
Explosion Properties  
Density(g/cm³)  
Form : Powder  
Color : Black  
Odor : odorless  
: Not applicable  
: Not applicable  
: 100 - 130  
: Not applicable  
: > 350  
: No data  
: 1.1 (bulk density : approx. 0.35)  
Solubility in Water  
: Negligible  
10.STABILITY AND REACTIVITY  
Stability  
: Stable  
Hazardous Reactions  
Conditions to Avoid  
Materials to Avoid  
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.  
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.  
: Oxidizing Materials  
Hazardous Decomposition Products : CO, CO2 and NOX  
Further Information  
: None Dermal  
11.TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION  
Acute Toxicity  
Ingestion(oral)  
Inhalationꢀ  
Eye irritation  
Skin irritation  
Skin sensitizer  
Mutagenicity  
: LD50 > 2000mg/kg (Rats) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: LC50 > 5.0mg/L (Rats) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: Not an irritant (Rabbits) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: Not an irritant (Rabbits) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: No sensitization[Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: Negative (Ames Test) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
Carcinogenicity : In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human  
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate human  
evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of carcinogenicity. The  
classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats receiving chronic inhalation  
exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle overload of the lung. Studies  
performed in animal models other than rats did not show any association between carbon black  
and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer bioassay using a typical toner preparation, where  
carbon black is bound in a resin matrix, demonstrated no association between toner exposure  
and tumor development in rats.  
Chronic Effect  
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate degree of  
lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration (16mg/m3) exposure  
group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of the animals in the middle  
(4mg/m3) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was reported in the lowest (1mg/m3)  
exposure group, the most relevant level to potential human exposures.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 4/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNo.F-01791  
12.ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION  
Ecotoxicity  
On available data, toner is not harmful to aquatic organisms  
13.DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS  
Waste from Residues  
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,  
state and local environmental regulations.  
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal, state  
and local environmental regulations.  
14.TRANSPORT INFORMATION  
UN Classification  
: None  
Not classified as hazardous for transport.  
15.REGULATORY INFORMATION  
US Information  
TSCA(Toxic Substances Control Act) :  
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.  
SARA(Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III  
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance : None  
311/312 Hazard Classification  
EU Information  
: None  
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC  
Symbol & Indication  
R-Phrase  
: Not required  
: Not required  
76/769/EEC  
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or  
order under 76/769/EEC.  
16.OTHER INFORMATION  
NFPA Rating (USA)  
: Health=1  
Flammability=1  
Reactivity=0  
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.  
References  
IARC(1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol. 65,  
Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon, pp.149-261  
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow, U.Mohr,  
S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein(1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation Exposure in Rats.  
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.  
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling of this  
product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be used with  
caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only hazards which  
exist.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 1/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNoF-31791  
1.PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION  
Product Name :MX-312NV / MX-312GV / MX-312AV / MX-312FV / MX-312JV(Black Developer)  
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation  
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan  
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.  
Area  
(Country)  
U.S.A.  
(Name and Telephone Number)  
Sharp Electronics Corporation  
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ  
Telephone number for information  
Emergency telephone number  
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.  
Telephone number for information  
Emergency telephone number  
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.  
: 1-800-237-4277  
North  
: 1-800-255-3924  
America  
Canada  
Australia  
Germany  
: 905-890-2100  
: 1-800-255-3924  
Oceania  
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH  
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg  
Telephone number to access MSDS  
For more information  
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics France S.A.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics GMBH  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB  
: 1300-13-50-22  
: 040-2376-2185  
: 040-2376-2613  
United  
Kingdom  
France  
: 08705-274-277  
: 01-49-90-34-00  
: 01-727-19-0  
: 02895951  
Austria  
Italy  
Europe  
Spain  
: 93-581-97-00  
: 30-6359500  
: 08-634-36-00  
: 01-846-6111  
Netherlands  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
U.A.E.  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Electronics(Schweiz)AG  
Telephone number for information  
Sharp Middle East FZE  
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai  
Telephone number for information  
Middle  
East  
: 04-815311  
2.COMPOSITION / INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS  
Substance[ ]  
Preparation[X]  
Ingredient  
CAS No.  
Proportion  
OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK-TWA  
NOHSC-TWA  
Iron powder  
Silicone resin  
7439-89-6  
Confidential  
>90%  
1-5%  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Styrene-Acrylate  
copolymer  
Carbon black  
Confidential  
5-10%  
0.1-1%  
Not listed  
3.5mg/m3  
Not listed  
3.5mg/m3  
Not listed  
Not listed  
Not listed  
3mg/m3  
1333-86-4  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 2/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNoF-31791  
3.HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION  
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products  
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests  
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do not  
indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.  
Environmental Effects : No toxic to aquatic orgabisms.  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
Specific Hazardsꢀ ꢀ ꢀ : Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)  
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe) : Not classified as dangerous  
4.FIRST-AID MEASURES  
Route(s) of Entry : Inhalation?  
Skin?  
No  
Ingestion?  
Possible but very unusual.  
No  
Inhalation  
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.  
Skin Contact : Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.  
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.  
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.  
Ingestion  
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water. If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult  
medical personnel.  
5.FIRE-FIGHTING MEASURES  
Extinguishing Media  
: Water, CO2, foam and dry chemicals  
Special Fire Fighting Procedures : None  
Fire and Explosion Hazards : Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an explosive  
mixture.  
6.ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES  
Personal Precautions  
Environmental Precautions  
Methods for Cleaning Up  
: None  
: None  
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large amount is  
released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of creating a  
dust explosion.  
7.HANDLING AND STORAGE  
Handling  
Technical Measures  
Precautions  
: None  
: None  
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long  
term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.  
Storage  
Technical Measures  
Storage Conditions  
: None  
: Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.  
Keep out of the reach of children.  
Incompatible Products : None  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 3/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNoF-31791  
8.EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION  
Engineering Measures  
Ventilation  
: Not required under intended use.  
Exposure Limit Valuesꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ  
OSHA-PEL(USA)  
ACGIH-TLV(USA)  
: 15mg/m3 (Total Dust) , 5mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)  
: 10mg/m3 (Total Dust) ,3mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)  
Personal Protective Equipment  
Respiratory Protection  
Hand Protection  
Eye Protection  
Skin Protection  
: Not required when used as intended in Sharp equipment.  
: Not required when used as intended in Sharp equipment.  
: Not required when used as intended in Sharp equipment.  
: Not required when used as intended in Sharp equipment.  
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large  
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.  
Other Protective Equipment  
9.PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES  
Appearance  
Physical State : Solid  
Ph  
Boiling / Melting Point  
Flash Point(°C)  
lgnition Point(°C )  
Explosion Properties  
Density(g/cm³)  
Form : Powder  
Color : Black  
Odor : odorless  
: Not applicable  
: Not applicable  
: Not applicable  
: No data  
: No data  
: Approx.5.0 (bulk density : Approx. 2.0)  
Solubility in Water  
: Negligible  
10.STABILITY AND REACTIVITY  
Stability  
: Stable  
Hazardous Reactions  
Conditions to Avoid  
Materials to Avoid  
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.  
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.  
: Oxidizing Materials  
Hazardous Decomposition Products : CO, CO2 and NOX  
Further Information  
11.TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION  
Acute Toxicity  
: None  
Ingestion(oral)  
Inhalation  
: LD50 > 2000mg/kg (Rats) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: No Data  
Eye irritation  
: No Data  
Skin irritation  
Skin sensitizer  
Mutagenicity  
Carcinogenicity  
: Not an irritant [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: No sensitization [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: Negative (Ames Test) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]  
: In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human  
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate human  
evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of carcinogenicity. The  
classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats receiving chronic inhalation  
exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle overload of the lung. Studies  
performed in animal models other than rats did not show any association between carbon black  
and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer bioassay using a typical toner preparation ,  
where carbon black is bound in a resin matrix, demonstrated no association between toner  
exposure and tumor development in rats.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET  
Page : 4/4  
Date Issued : Jun. 1, 2009  
MSDSNoF-31791  
Chronic Effect  
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate degree  
of lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration (16mg/m3) exposure  
group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of the animals in the middle  
(4mg/m3) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was reported in the lowest (1mg/m3)  
exposure group, the most relevant level to potential human exposures.  
12.ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION  
Ecotoxicity  
On available data, toner is not harmful to aquatic organisms.  
ꢀ ꢀ  
13.DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS  
Waste from Residues  
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,  
state and local environmental regulations.  
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal, state  
and local environmental regulations.  
14.TRANSPORT INFORMATION  
UN Classification  
: None  
Not classified as hazardous for transport.  
15.REGULATORY INFORMATION  
US Information  
TSCA(Toxic Substances Control Act) :  
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.  
SARA(Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III  
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance : None  
311/312 Hazard Classification  
EU Information  
: None  
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC  
Symbol & Indication  
R-Phrase  
: Not required  
: Not required  
76/769/EEC  
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or  
order under 76/769/EEC.  
16.OTHER INFORMATION  
NFPA Rating (USA)  
: Health=1  
Flammability=1  
Reactivity=0  
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.  
References  
IARC(1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol. 65,  
Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon, pp.149-261  
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow, U.Mohr,  
S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein(1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation Exposure in Rats.  
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.  
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling of this  
product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be used with  
caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only hazards which  
exist.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Symbols  
Center tray ........................................................ 9, 131  
Center tray counter function.................................... 25  
Change administrator password ........................... 109  
Changing a tray's paper tray  
[#/P] key .......................................................11, 93, 94  
2 - 8  
2 x 500-sheet paper feed unit ................132, 139, 141  
256MB expansion memory board ..........................139  
[2-SIDED COPY] key ...................................22, 28, 29  
500-sheet paper feed unit ......................132, 139, 141  
512MB expansion memory board ..........................139  
8MB fax memory......................................................39  
and paper size settings ........................................... 20  
Changing the send settings..................................... 82  
Checking the IP address ......................................... 89  
Checking the toner quantity .................................. 137  
Cleaning the machine  
- Bypass tray paper feed roller ......................... 138  
- Document glass ............................................. 137  
- RSPF.............................................................. 137  
[CLEAR ALL] key .............................................. 11, 15  
CLEAR key.................................................. 11, 23, 24  
Clock ....................................................................... 90  
Color paper ............................................................. 16  
Configuring DNS server settings............................. 59  
Configuring LDAP server settings ........................... 60  
Configuring SMTP server settings........................... 59  
Copy finishing functions  
- Group copy....................................................... 36  
- Offset function.................................................. 36  
- Sort copy.......................................................... 36  
- Staple sort........................................................ 38  
[COPY] key ............................................. 22, 134, 137  
Copy number display .............................................. 22  
Copy ratio display.................................................... 22  
[COPY RATIO] key ..................................... 22, 32, 33  
Copy settings ........................................................ 110  
Cover copy .............................................................. 49  
[COVER] key..................................................... 40, 50  
A
ABCDEF configuration.............................................92  
About the web page .................................................57  
Accessing web pages ..............................................56  
Account control ......................................................103  
Account number.......................................................95  
Address book screen ...............................................71  
Adjusting the exposure.............................................30  
Administrator password....................................96, 109  
Administrator setting list...........................................99  
Administrator settings...............................................96  
- Account control ...............................................103  
- Change administrator password .....................109  
- Copy settings ..................................................110  
- Device control .................................................107  
- Energy save....................................................105  
- Operation settings...........................................106  
- Print settings ...................................................111  
- Product key.....................................................109  
- Scanner settings .............................................115  
Audting mode...........................................................95  
[AUTO IMAGE] key..................................................31  
Auto tray switching...................................................92  
Automatic ratio selection..........................................31  
Automatic two-sided copying  
D
[DELETE] key.......................................................... 94  
[DETAIL] key ........................................................... 13  
Device control ....................................................... 107  
Disabling of two-sided printing on  
- Document glass ...............................................28  
- RSPF ................................................................29  
AZERTY configuration .............................................92  
letterhead paper ...................................................... 92  
Display contrast................................................. 90, 92  
Display message................................................... 117  
Display switching key .............................................. 13  
Document feeder cover..................................... 9, 128  
Document feeder tray.................................. 9, 24, 128  
Document glass ........................................................ 9  
Document transport cover................................. 9, 128  
Document transport cover knob ........................ 9, 128  
Dual page copy ....................................................... 44  
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key.................................. 40, 44  
B
B/W reverse copy.....................................................51  
[B/W REVERSE] key..........................................40, 51  
Barcode font kit ......................................................139  
Basic settings for network scanning.........................58  
Basic transmission method ......................................72  
[BINDING CHANGE] key .........................................28  
Bypass feed .............................................................27  
Bypass tray ........................................10, 27, 129, 138  
Bypass tray extension........................................10, 19  
[BYPASS TRAY] key................................................21  
Bypass tray paper feed roller .................................138  
Bypass tray paper guides.........................................10  
E
Editing and deleting programmed transmission  
destinations ............................................................. 66  
Energy save .......................................................... 105  
Enlargement key ..................................................... 32  
Envelope ........................................................... 16, 17  
Erase copy .............................................................. 43  
[ERASE] key ..................................................... 40, 43  
C
Card shot..................................................................52  
[CARD SHOT] key .............................................40, 52  
Canceling an e-mail/FTP transmission ....................83  
Cautions on handling the machine.............................5  
Cautions on using the machine..................................4  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erase mode  
List print............................................................. 90, 92  
Loading paper ......................................................... 16  
Loading paper in the bypass tray ............................ 19  
Loading the paper in the paper tray ........................ 18  
[LOGOUT] key .................................................. 11, 95  
- Center erase .....................................................43  
- Edge erase........................................................43  
- Edge+center erase............................................43  
Erase width ..............................................................43  
Error message........................................................117  
Exit area.............................................................9, 128  
Exposure adjustment ...............................................30  
Exposure display......................................................22  
[EXPOSURE] key...............................................22, 30  
Exposure value guidelines .......................................30  
Extra image adjust ...................................................27  
M
Main screen of copy mode ...................................... 22  
[MANUAL] key......................................................... 48  
Manual ratio selection ............................................. 32  
Margin shift copy ..................................................... 42  
[MARGIN SHIFT] key........................................ 40, 42  
[MENU] key ............................................................. 32  
Message display ..................................................... 22  
Metadata delivery (data entry) .................... 84, 85, 86  
Metadata fields........................................................ 88  
Misfed original....................................................... 128  
Misfeed in an output tray....................................... 133  
Misfeed in the bypass tray .................................... 129  
Misfeed in the center tray...................................... 131  
Misfeed in the fusing area ..................................... 130  
Misfeed in the lower paper tray ............................. 132  
Misfeed in the machine ......................................... 129  
Misfeed in the paper feed area ............................. 129  
Misfeed in the upper exit area............................... 133  
Misfeed in the upper paper tray ............................ 131  
Misfeed removal  
F
Facsimile expansion kit..........................................139  
[FAX JOB] key..........................................................13  
[FAX] key  
- DATA indicator..................................................11  
- LINE indicator ...................................................11  
Finisher ............................................38, 133, 135, 139  
Front cover.........................................9, 129, 130, 134  
Fusing unit paper guide....................................10, 130  
Fusing unit release lever..................................10, 130  
G
Grayed out ...............................................................12  
Group copy...............................................................36  
[GROUP] key ...........................................................37  
- Bypass tray .................................................... 129  
- Center tray ..................................................... 131  
- Lower paper tray ............................................ 132  
- Machine.......................................................... 129  
- Output tray ..................................................... 133  
- Right tray........................................................ 132  
- RSPF.............................................................. 128  
- Upper exit tray................................................ 133  
- Upper paper tray ............................................ 131  
Misfeed removal guidance .................................... 127  
Mixed feeding.......................................................... 26  
Mode select keys .................................................... 11  
Mode switching key................................................. 13  
Multi shot copy ....................................................... 47  
[MULTI SHOT] key............................................ 40, 47  
H
Handles......................................................................9  
Heavy paper.............................................................16  
How to place the original  
- Document glass ................................................23  
- RSPF ................................................................24  
I
Icon (Job status screen)...........................................13  
Important points when inserting paper  
in the bypass tray.....................................................19  
Important points when selecting an installation site...4  
[INFORMATION] key .............................................127  
Initial settings ...........................................................15  
[INTERRUPT] key..............................................11, 35  
Interrupting copy ......................................................35  
N
Network scanner expansion kit ............................. 139  
J
Normal copying  
[JOB BUILD] key................................................40, 46  
Job build mode...................................................24, 46  
Job list......................................................................13  
Job program  
- Document glass ............................................... 23  
- RSPF................................................................ 24  
Number of pages fed through the RSPF................. 92  
Number of pages sent using the network  
- Deleting.............................................................94  
- Executing ..........................................................94  
- Storing.........................................................92, 93  
Job separator tray ..............................................9, 139  
[JOB STATUS] key ............................................11, 13  
Job status screen.....................................................13  
scanner function...................................................... 92  
Number of sent and received fax pages ................. 92  
Number of times the stapler was used.................... 92  
Number of two-sided copies.................................... 92  
Numeric keys .......................................................... 11  
O
L
Offset function ................................................... 36, 37  
Offset tray................................................ 38, 108, 140  
Operation panel......................................................... 9  
Operation settings ................................................. 106  
Optional equipment ............................................... 139  
Label ........................................................................16  
Laser information .......................................................5  
Layout ......................................................................47  
Letterhead paper..........................................16, 17, 28  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Orientation of the original (Staple sort) ....................38  
Original feed display.................................................22  
Original guides ...........................................................9  
Original image type  
- Photo ................................................................30  
- Text...................................................................30  
- Text/photo.........................................................30  
Original size ...........................................23, 24, 25, 48  
Original size display .................................................22  
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key ........................................40, 48  
Originals that can be used in the RSPF...................25  
[OUTPUT] key........................................22, 36, 37, 39  
Output tray .............................................................133  
R
[READ-END] key................................... 37, 39, 46, 47  
Recycled paper ....................................................... 16  
Reduction key ......................................................... 32  
Reduction/enlargement/zoom ................................. 31  
Release roller ........................................................ 128  
Replacing the toner cartridge ................................ 134  
Restricting use of the network scanner function...... 69  
Reversing tray ................................................... 9, 128  
Right tray....................................................... 132, 139  
Roller rotating knob ................................. 10, 129, 130  
Rotation copying ..................................................... 26  
RSPF................................................. 24, 25, 128, 144  
P
S
Pamphlet copy .........................................................45  
[PAMPHLET COPY] key....................................40, 45  
Paper........................................................................16  
Paper capacity .........................................................16  
Paper misfeeds ......................................................121  
Paper select display.................................................22  
[PAPER SELECT] key .....................21, 22, 23, 24, 27  
Paper size ..........................................................16, 20  
Paper size card ........................................................18  
Paper size display....................................................22  
Paper tray.......................................10, 16, 18, 20, 131  
Paper type....................................................16, 20, 21  
Paper weight ............................................................16  
Part names and functions  
- Operation panel ................................................11  
Passwords................................................................68  
Peripheral devices..................................................139  
Photoconductive drum .....................................10, 129  
Plain paper...............................................................16  
Points to note when making copies..........................25  
Power off..................................................................14  
Power on..................................................................14  
Power outlet ...............................................................4  
Power save modes  
- Auto power shut-off mode.................................15  
- Preheat mode ...................................................15  
Power switch........................................................9, 14  
Preset enlargement ratios........................................32  
[PRINT JOB] key......................................................13  
[PRINT] key  
- DATA indicator..................................................11  
- ONLINE indicator..............................................11  
Print settings ..........................................................111  
Printer expansion kit...............................................139  
[PRIORITY] key........................................................13  
Problems when the network scanner function  
is used....................................................................123  
Product key ............................................................109  
Programming custom index names..........................61  
Protecting information programmed in the  
[SCAN] key  
- DATA indicator........................................... 11, 72  
[SCAN TO] key........................................................ 13  
Scanner settings ................................................... 115  
Scanning and transmitting a two-sided original....... 76  
Scanning settings.................................................... 78  
Selecting the file format........................................... 81  
Selecting the original image type ............................ 30  
Selecting the quality ................................................ 79  
Selecting the resolution........................................... 80  
Setting the paper type in the bypass tray  
- [PAPER SELECT] key ..................................... 21  
- [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key............................... 21  
Setting up destination information........................... 62  
Shift direction .......................................................... 42  
Side cover ....................................................... 10, 130  
Side cover handle ................................................... 10  
Sort copy ................................................................. 36  
[SORT] key.............................................................. 37  
Special modes  
- B/W reverse copy............................................. 51  
- Card shot.......................................................... 52  
- Cover copy....................................................... 49  
- Dual page copy ................................................ 44  
- Erase copy ....................................................... 43  
- Job build mode................................................. 46  
- Margin shift copy.............................................. 42  
- Multi shot copy ................................................. 47  
- Original size ..................................................... 48  
- Pamphlet copy ................................................. 45  
[SPECIAL MODES] key .............................. 22, 40, 41  
Special papers ........................................................ 26  
- Envelope .......................................................... 17  
- Letterhead paper.............................................. 17  
Specifications ........................................................ 143  
Staple cartridge ..................................................... 135  
Staple cartridge replacement ................................ 135  
Staple case ................................................... 135, 140  
Staple jam removal ............................................... 136  
Staple sort............................................................... 38  
[STAPLE SORT] key............................................... 39  
Stapling positions .................................................... 38  
[START] key................................................ 11, 23, 24  
[STOP/DELETE] key............................................... 13  
Storage of supplies ............................................... 142  
[STORE/DELETE] key ...................................... 93, 94  
web page..................................................................68  
PS3 expansion kit ..................................................139  
Q
QWERTY configuration............................................92  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing destinations for scan to desktop ..................64  
Storing destinations for scan to e-mail.....................62  
Storing destinations for scan to FTP........................63  
Storing groups (Scan to E-mail)...............................65  
Storing the sender information (Scan to E-mail)  
Stream feeding mode...............................................24  
System settings..................................................90, 96  
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.....................11, 20, 21, 91  
T
Thin paper................................................................16  
Toner cartridge.................................................10, 134  
Toner cartridge lock release lever....................10, 134  
Total count .................................................90, 92, 137  
Total number of copies and printed pages...............92  
Touch panel .......................................................11, 12  
To the administrator of the machine.......................160  
Transmission methods for scan to e-mail ................74  
Transparency film.........................................16, 17, 28  
Tray number.......................................................16, 20  
Tray settings...........................................20, 21, 90, 92  
[TRAY SETTINGS] key......................................20, 21  
Troubleshooting .....................................................119  
U
Upper exit area.......................................................133  
Upper right side cover......................................10, 133  
User authentication ..................................................69  
Using the touch panel ..............................................12  
W
Warm-up ..................................................................14  
X
[X] key ......................................................................34  
XY ZOOM copying ...................................................33  
[XY ZOOM] key........................................................33  
Y
[Y] key ......................................................................34  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX BY PURPOSE  
Preparations  
Special modes, using  
Bypass tray, loading paper in...................................19  
Initial settings, returning to .......................................15  
Paper size, changing................................................20  
Paper type, changing ...............................................20  
Paper, loading..........................................................18  
Power, turning off.....................................................14  
Power, turning on.....................................................14  
- B/W reverse copy............................................. 51  
- Card shot copy................................................. 52  
- Cover copy....................................................... 49  
- Dual page copy ................................................ 44  
- Erase copy ....................................................... 43  
- Job build mode................................................. 46  
- Margin shift copy.............................................. 42  
- Multi shot copy ................................................. 47  
- Original size ..................................................... 48  
- Pamphlet copy ................................................. 45  
Staple sort function, using....................................... 38  
Making copies  
Auditing mode, copying when enabled ....................95  
Automatic two-sided copying  
- Document glass ................................................28  
- RSPF ................................................................29  
Bypass tray, copying from........................................27  
Copy run, stopping.............................................23, 24  
Copying  
- Document glass ................................................23  
- RSPF ................................................................24  
Document glass, copying from.................................23  
Enlarging/reducing copies  
- Automatic ratio selection...................................31  
- Manual ratio selection.......................................32  
- XY zoom copying..............................................33  
Exposure, adjusting..................................................30  
Exposure, selecting..................................................30  
Image orientation, changing...............................28, 29  
Interrupt copying ......................................................35  
Mixed feeding...........................................................26  
Original image type, selecting..................................30  
Paper size (tray), selecting manually .......................23  
RSPF, copying from.................................................24  
Special paper, copying on........................................27  
Stream feeding mode, using ....................................24  
Using network scanenr functions  
Accessing web pages ............................................. 56  
Basic transmission method ..................................... 72  
Canceling an e-mail/FTP transmission.................... 83  
Changing the send settings..................................... 82  
Checking the IP address ......................................... 89  
Configuring DNS server settings............................. 59  
Configuring LDAP server settings ........................... 60  
Configuring SMTP server settings........................... 59  
Editing and deleting programmed transmission  
destinations ............................................................. 66  
Programming custom index names......................... 61  
Protecting information programmed in the  
web page................................................................. 68  
Restricting use of the network scanner function...... 69  
Scanning and transmitting a two-sided original....... 76  
Scanning settings.................................................... 78  
Selecting the file format........................................... 81  
Selecting the quality ................................................ 79  
Selecting the resolution........................................... 80  
Setting up destination information........................... 62  
Storing destinations for scan to desktop ................. 64  
Storing destinations for scan to e-mail .................... 62  
Storing destinations for scan to FTP ....................... 63  
Storing groups (Scan to E-mail) .............................. 65  
Storing the sender information (Scan to E-mail) ..... 67  
Transmission methods for scan to e-mail................ 74  
Transmitting metadata ............................................ 86  
Using convenient copy functions  
Black and white reverse copying..............................51  
Cover, adding to copies ...........................................49  
Dual page copying ...................................................44  
Erase copying ..........................................................43  
Group copying, using ...............................................36  
Large number of originals, copying..........................46  
Margin, creating .......................................................42  
Multi shot copying ....................................................47  
Offset function, using ...............................................36  
Original size, specifying ...........................................48  
Pamphlet copying.....................................................45  
Selecting finishing functions  
- Group copying...................................................36  
- Offset function...................................................36  
- Sort copying......................................................36  
- Staple sort function ...........................................38  
Sort copying, using...................................................36  
Making the machine easier to use  
Canceling a job ....................................................... 13  
Canceling a job in progress..................................... 13  
Date and time, setting ............................................. 92  
Deleting a job .......................................................... 13  
Display contrast, adjusting ...................................... 92  
Job details, displaying ............................................. 13  
Job program, deleting ............................................. 94  
Job program, executing........................................... 94  
Job program, storing ............................................... 93  
Keyboard, changing ................................................ 92  
Lists, printing ........................................................... 92  
Priority, giving to a specified job.............................. 13  
System settings, configuring ............................. 90, 96  
Total count, displaying ............................................ 92  
Trays, configuring settings ...................................... 92  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the administrator settings  
Change administrator password ............................109  
Copy settings .........................................................110  
Device control ........................................................107  
Energy save ...........................................................105  
Operation settings..................................................106  
Print settings ..........................................................111  
Product key ............................................................109  
Scanner settings ....................................................115  
Using the administrator settings...............................97  
Troubleshooting and maintenance  
Cleaning the machine ............................................137  
Misfeeds, removing  
- Bypass tray .....................................................129  
- Center tray ......................................................131  
- Lower paper tray.............................................132  
- Machine ..........................................................129  
- Output tray ......................................................133  
- Right tray.........................................................132  
- RSPF ..............................................................128  
- Upper exit area ...............................................133  
- Upper paper tray.............................................131  
Staple cartridge, replacing .....................................135  
Staple jams, removing............................................136  
Toner cartridge, replacing ......................................134  
Toner, checking......................................................137  
Total count, checking .............................................137  
Troubleshooting .....................................................116  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademark acknowledgments  
The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral  
devices and accessories.  
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
• Microsoft , Windows , Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
®
®
®
®
Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista , Windows Server 2008 and Internet Explorer are registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.  
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
• Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.  
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of  
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.  
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.  
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.  
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.  
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.  
Candid and Taffy are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may  
be registered in certain jurisdictions. CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv, Garamond  
and Halbfett Kursiv are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Albertus, Arial,  
Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype Corporation registered in the United States  
Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph, Mona Lisa,  
Zapf Chancery and Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States Patent and  
Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Clarendon, Eurostile, Helvetica, Optima, Palatino, Stempel  
Garamond, Times and Univers are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, which may be registered in certain  
jurisdictions, exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, a wholly owned subsidiary of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.  
Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco and New York are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. and may be registered in certain  
jurisdictions. HGGothicB, HGMinchoL, HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh Company, Ltd. and may be  
registered in some jurisdictions. Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other  
countries. Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of Arthur Baker and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Antique Olive is a  
trademark of Marcel Olive and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Hoefler Text is a trademark of Johnathan Hoefler and may  
be registered in some jurisdictions. ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States Patent  
and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Agfa is a trademark of the Agfa-Gevaert Group and may be  
registered in certain jurisdictions. Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the  
United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks  
of Apple Computer Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and other countries. PostScript is a trademark  
of Adobe Systems Incorporated and may be registered in some jurisdictions. HP, PCL, FontSmart and LaserJet are trademarks of  
Hewlett-Packard Company and may be registered in some jurisdictions. The Type 1 processor resident in Monotype Imaging's  
UFST product is under license from Electronics For Imaging, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information that the administrator of the machine requires is printed  
on the back of this page.  
(Separate this page from the manual and keep it in a safe place. In  
addition, fill in the name of the administrator and the administrator's  
contact information in the left hand margin.)  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF  
THE MACHINE  
(Separate this page from the manual and keep it in a safe place.)  
Factory default passwords  
When accessing the system settings, the administrator password is required to log in with administrator  
rights. The system settings can be configured in the Web pages as well as on the operation panel. To  
access the system settings using the Web pages, a password is also required.  
Factory default administrator password  
Factory default setting: 00000  
Store a new administrator password as soon as the machine is installed.  
Once the administrator password has been changed, the new password is required to restore the factory  
default password. Take care to remember the new password.  
Factory default passwords (Web pages)  
There are two factory default accounts: "Administrator" and "User". A person who logs in as an  
"Administrator" can configure all settings in the Web pages. In addition, an administrator can restrict  
access to other settings by enabling "User" accounts.  
The factory default passwords are shown below.  
Factory default account  
Factory default password  
Sharp  
Sharp  
User  
user  
admin  
Administrator  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
Caution:  
This connector is only intended for service purposes.  
Any connection to this terminal may cause malfunctions  
of the copy machine.  
Instruction for service technician:  
The cable length for the service terminal has to be less  
than 10 feet (3 m).  
RSPF connector  
Finisher connector  
USB connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTICE for users in the USA  
BE SURE TO ASK YOUR AUTHORIZED SHARP DEALER ABOUT THE  
WARRANTY THAT YOUR SELLING DEALER EXTENDS TO YOU. In order to  
assure you, the end-user, of warranty protection, Sharp extends a limited warranty to  
each of its authorized dealers and, in turn, requires each of its authorized dealers to  
extend its own warranty to you on terms that are no less favorable than those given  
to the dealer by Sharp. You should be aware, however, that Sharp does not itself  
extend any warranties, either express or implied, directly to you, the end-user, and no  
one is authorized to make any representations or warranties on behalf of Sharp.  
Specifically, SHARP DOES NOT EXTEND TO YOU, THE END-USER, ANY  
EXPRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,  
FITNESS FOR USE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN  
CONNECTION WITH THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE EMBODIED  
IN, OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS PRODUCT. Sharp is not responsible  
for any damages or loss, either direct, incidental or consequential, which you, the  
end-user, may experience as a result of your purchase or use of the hardware,  
software or firmware embodied in or used in conjunction with this Product. Your sole  
remedy, in the event that you encounter any difficulties with this Product, is against  
the authorized dealer from which you purchased the Product.  
MX-M260 Digital Multifunctional System  
MX-M310 Digital Multifunctional System  
In the event that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments,  
please contact the General Manager, Business Products Group, Sharp Electronics  
Corporation, 1 Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ 07495-1163, so that Sharp can try to help  
assure complete satisfaction of all the warranty rights to which you are entitled from  
the authorized dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION  
1 Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07495-1163.  
www.sharpusa.com  
SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.  
335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9  
This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based soy oil ink  
to help protect the environment.  
PRINTED IN CHINA  
2009G  
KS1  
TINSE2026QSZZ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sennheiser Stereo Receiver HDI 830 User Manual
Sonance Stereo Amplifier 275 SE Series User Manual
Sony Car Satellite TV System BKM FW50 User Manual
Sony Cassette Player WM FX221 User Manual
Sony Cassette Player WM FX491ST User Manual
Sony MP3 Player WM FS595 User Manual
Sony Stereo Amplifier TA F501ES User Manual
Sony Stereo Receiver STR DE485 User Manual
Spalding Fitness Equipment M7703241 User Manual
Sterling Power Products Automobile Battery Charger BB121250 User Manual